Home

Modicon M340 - BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet - Schneider

1. and service errors General Status Name Description of Status Status Code in hex 1F Vendor specific error A vendor specific error has been detected The additional code field of the error response defines the particular error encountered Use this general code only when none of the codes presented in this table or within an object class definition accurately reflect the detected error 20 Invalid parameter A parameter associated with the request was invalid This code is used when a parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an application object specification 21 Write once value or An attempt was made to write to a write once medium e g WORM medium already written drive PROM that has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established 22 Invalid reply received An invalid reply is received e g reply service code does not match the request service code or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply size This status code an serve for other causes of invalid replies 23 Buffer overflow The message received is larger than the receiving buffer can handle The entire message was discarded 24 Message format error The format of the received message is not supported by the server 25 Key failure in path The key segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not match the destination modul
2. Bandwidth Device Packet size X Load Bandwidth I O Adapter A 8000 bits X 500 pps 4 Mbps I O Adapter B 4096 bits X 134 pps 0 554 Mbps I O Drive C 8000 bits X 134 pps 1 07 Mbps 1 0 Scanner D 8000 bits X 80 pps 0 64 Mbps Total 6 26 Mbps Switch 6 26 Mbps Conclusion The projected total load for the module 848 pps is within the device implicit messaging limit of 12000 data packets per second The projected total bandwidth for the communication module 6 26 Mbps is also within the device implicit messaging bandwidth limit of 80 Mbps The projected total load and bandwidth for the remote devices including the switch are also within their 90 load and bandwidth limits Device 90 of Load Limit 90 of Bandwidth Limit Ethernet Communication Module 10800 pps 72 Mbps I O Adapter A 7200 pps 63 Mbps I O Adapter B 7200 pps 63 Mbps I O Drive C 7200 pps 63 Mbps 1 0 Scanner D 10800 pps 72 Mbps NOTE Although message load contributed by explicit messaging are not included in the above calculations such load contributions are presumed to be less than 10 of the device load and bandwidth S1A34009 10 2014 225 Optimizing Performance 226 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 6 CIP Objects Overview The Ethernet communication module can access CIP data and services located in connected devices The CIP objects and their co
3. Number of Emails Sent 2 Number of Responses from Email Server 25 Number of Errors 0 Last Error 16 0 Time elapses since last e mail successfully sent secs 23 Number of times link to the server down 0 Reset Counters Copyright 1998 2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Click the Reset Counter button to reset to 0 the Email Service Statistics To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet SMTP Diagnostics 3 If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER S1A34009 10 2014 383 Embedded Web Pages Email diagnostic Parameters Electronic mail notification service parameters include the following Parameter Description Email Service Status The status of this service in the Ethernet communication module e Operational Service Disabled Email Server Status The connection status between Ethernet communication module and the SMTP server check mark connected no check mark not connected NOTE Status is checked at start up and at least every 30 minutes after start up IP Address IP address of the SMTP server Information of Last Email Header Used
4. No instance attributes are supported Services The Modbus object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance hex dec 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single X x 4B 75 Read_Discrete_Inputs x X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 235 CIP objects Service ID Description Class Instance hex dec 4c 76 Read_Coils x 4D 77 Read_Input_Registers X 4E 78 Read_Holding_Registers X 4F 79 Write_Coils X 50 80 Write_Holding_Registers x 51 81 Modbus_Passthrough x X supported not supported 236 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Quality Of Service QoS Object Overview The QoS object implements Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP or DiffServe values for the purpose of providing a method of prioritizing Ethernet messages The QoS object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 48 hex 72 decimal Instance IDs The QoS object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes The QoS object consists of the following attributes Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes
5. EtherNet IP Implicit or Explicit Messaging Detected Error Codes Explicit Messaging Communication and Operation Reports CIP General Status Codes CIP General Status Codes Modbus Exception Response MODBUS Exception Response Codes Codes 0000 332 333 335 337 343 343 345 346 347 348 349 352 354 355 356 361 365 366 367 368 371 373 375 377 379 380 382 383 385 387 389 391 392 395 399 399 403 403 1A34009 10 2014 Appendix D Email Detected Error Response Codes 405 Electronic Mail Notification Service Detected Error Response Codes 405 Glossary sieiw ds des ethene eedeleases derek cnare eds 407 INDEX saci ce oieseese ie teiee Gee oeng kE Eea aa 409 1A34009 10 2014 Safety Information G Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not p The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an followed hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury
6. 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module that is upstream of the target device 2 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu EtherNet IP Explicit Message Result The EtherNet IP Explicit Message window opens 3 Configure the explicit message using the following fields IP Address The IP address of the target device used to identify the target of the explicit message In the above example 192 168 1 6 Class The class identifier of the target device used in the construction of the message path An integer from 1 to 65535 In this example 4 Instance The class instance of the target device used in the construction of the message path An integer from 0 to 65535 In this example 100 Attribute Optional The specific device attribute or property that is the target of the explicit message used in the construction of the message path An integer from 0 to 65535 In this example 3 NOTE Select the check box to enable this field NOTE Refer to your EtherNet IP device user manual for class instance and attribute values Number The integer associated with the service to be performed by the explicit message An integer from 1 to 127 NOTE If you select Custom Service as the named service type in a service number This field is read only for all other services Name Select the service the explicit message is intended to perform In this example Get_Att
7. Advantys Fieldbus Image Unity Pro EIP Items STB Module Description Word Bit s Byte Bit s 10 0 7 18 0 7 AVO 1250 output status ch 2 8 15 NA NA NA not used Output Data Advantys Fieldbus Image Unity Pro EIP Items Module Description Word Bit s Byte Bit s 1 0 1 0 0 1 DDO 3200 output data 2 5 2 5 DDO 3410 output data 6 7 6 7 NA not used 8 13 1 0 5 DDO 3600 output data 14 15 6 7 NA not used 2 0 15 2 0 7 AVO 1250 output data ch 1 3 0 7 3 0 15 4 0 7 AVO 1250 output data ch 2 5 0 7 This example shows you how to create 19 bytes of inputs and 6 bytes of outputs To more efficiently use space this example creates items in the following sequence e input bit items e input byte and word items e output bit items e output byte and word items Creating Input Bit Items To create input bit items for the STB NIC 2212 example beginning with 16 discrete inputs for NIC 2212 status Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module DTM Browser xj Host PC o A Saree H lt EtherNet IP 192 168 1 6 gt NIC2212_01 S1A34009 10 2014 145 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 2 Do one of the following inthe main menu select Edit Open or e click the right mouse button then select Open in the pop up menu The Device Editor opens displaying the DTM for the communication module In the left pane of t
8. Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 04 DSCP Urgent USINT x X For CIP transport class 0 1 Urgent priority messages default value 55 05 DSCP Scheduled USINT X X For CIP transport class 0 1 Urgent priority messages default value 47 X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 237 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 06 DSCP High USINT For CIP transport class 0 1 Urgent priority messages default value 43 07 DSCP Low USINT For CIP transport class 0 1 Urgent priority messages default value 31 08 DSCP Explicit USINT For CIP explicit messages transport class 2 3 and UCMM default value 27 X supported not supported NOTE A change in the instance attribute value takes effect on device re start for configurations made from flash memory Services The QoS object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance hex dec 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x x 10 16 Set_Attribute_Single x X supported not supported 238 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects TCP IP Interface Object Overview The TCP IP interface object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID F5 hex 245 decimal Instance I
9. VO Variable Creation Address Name Type Comment Prefix for name Type Comment VO Objects Channel V CH Configuration KW KD KF Select all System IV AMW Status IV MW Unselect all Parameter AMW MD D MF Command AMW MD ME Implicits a M aw Tein lF M ERR M Q 7 Aaw ap T aF Update Update Grid Filter on usage NOTE e The BMX NOC 0401 communication module supports only Channel System and Status I O Objects Not every bit is used e Refer to the Unity Pro help for instructions on how to use the I O Objects page 338 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Reading I O Objects Use a RI EAD STS function block in Unity Pro to update each of the following types of data e module data e channel data Updatin g module data To display module information follow these steps Step Action 1 Configure the READ_STS function block as follows CHr m MOD READ_STS CH Where r rack or station number m module or slot number MOD a constant indicating module data To view the data updated by the READ_ STS function block enter the corresponding direct addresses in the Unity Pro Animation table or use them in your program logic Object Description lr m MOD ERR Module detected error bit lr m MOD ERR is implicitly updated based on lr m 0 ERR MWr m MOD 0 Exchange Status Bit 0 readin
10. Enabling the FDR Service To enable the communication module s FDR service set the FDR Server field to Enabled To disable the service toggle the same field to Disabled NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to apply edited properties to networked devices Any networked Ethernet device equipped with FDR client functionality can subscribe to the communication module s FDR service The communication module can store up to 1 MB of FDR client operating parameter files When this file storage capacity is reached the module can not store any additional client FDR files The communication module can store FDR client files for up to 128 devices depending on the size of each stored file For example if the size of each FDR client file is small not more than 8 Ko the module could store up to the maximum of 128 parameter files Manually Adding Remote Devices to the DHCP Service Remote devices that are part of the communication module s Ethernet configuration and which have subscribed to the communication module s IP addressing service automatically appear in the Automatically Added Devices list Other remote devices that are not part of the communication module s configuration can be manually added to the communication module s DHCP IP addressing service 76 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring To manually add networked Ethernet devices which are
11. NOTE When a device is added to or removed from the project or when the active status of an existing device or a local slave changes the specific location of inputs and outputs in PLC memory also changes 186 1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Identifying the Connection Health Bits The Ethernet communication module can support up to 128 connections to remote devices The health of each connection is represented in a single bit value A health bit value of e 1 indicates the connection is active e 0 indicates the connection is inactive The health bits are contained in a 32 byte array in the Variables page of the Data Editor To display offline this byte array first sort the variables in ascending order of address then open the first input variable as shown below iJ Data Editor eee Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types ia _U Name F S EDT MDT I 1000T NOCO1_IN T_NOCO1_IN AMW e aS M HEALTH_BITS_IN ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE MW1 pj HEALTH_BITS_IN O BYTE MW1 9G HEALTH_BITS_IN 1 BYTE Mw a8 HEALTH BITS _IN 2 BYTE mw2 HEALTH _BITS_IN 3 BYTE HEALTH BITS_IN 4 BYTE HEALTH_BITS_IN 5 BYTE 9 HEALTH_BITS_IN 6 BYTE 8 HEALTH BITS _IN 7 BYTE amp HEALTH BITS_IN 7 BYTE To determine which health bit is mapped to a specific remote device connection in the Device Editor for the Ethernet communications
12. Daylight Saving Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving e Enabled turns ON the automatic clock adjustment for daylight savings e Disabled turns OFF the automatic clock adjustment for daylight savings Default Disabled If automatic adjustment of the clock for daylight savings is enabled use the next two fields to configure daylight saving adjustments Start Daylight Saving Month Select the month daylight savings begins Default March Day of Week Select the day of the week daylight savings begins Default Sunday Week Select the week of the month daylight savings begins Default 1 fist week of the month 98 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Property Description End Daylight Saving Month Select the month daylight savings ends Default November Day of Week Select the day of the week daylight savings ends Default Sunday Week Select the week of the month daylight savings ends Default 1 fist week of the month 1A34009 10 2014 99 Configuring Section 2 6 Security Security Features Security and HTTP FTP and TFTP Services You can enhance security for your project by disabling the FTP TFTP and HTTP services at times when you do not need to use them The module uses the HTTP service to provide access to the embedded webpages The module uses the FTP and TFTP services to support various features including
13. Vendor Devices Advanced Generic EDS Schneider Electric E Vendors G Generic Device Device Schneider Electric Molex incorporated Generic Device for Explicit Messaging Device Schneider Electric Rockwell Automation M_NOC0401 Communication Schneider Electric Schneider Electric P ETC101 Communication Schneider Electric WAGO Corporation Q_NOC77101 Communication Schneider Electric E Groups STBNIC2212 from EDS Device Schneider Electric Protocols 2 External Update Tool Reload catalog KAN 1 5 FB Bus _DIO Bus RIO Bus DTM Catalog 1A34009 10 2014 121 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Remove an EDS File from the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog Overview You can remove a module or device from the list of available devices in the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog by removing its EDS file When you remove an EDS file from the library the device or module is no longer displayed by Unity Pro in the DTM Catalog page of the Hardware Catalog window However removing an EDS file from the library does not delete the file Instead the EDS file remains in its stored location and can again be added to the catalog see page 178 at a future time Removing an EDS File from the Catalog To remove an EDS file from the catalog Step Action 1 If the DTM Browser is not already open in the Unity Pro main menu select Tools DTM Browser 2 In the DTM Browser
14. UDINT Frames for which reception on an interface is not successful due to an internal MAC sublayer receive detected error X supported not supported STAS40UY 10 2014 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 06 06 Interface Control STRUCT API of the connection Control Bits WORD Bit 0 Auto negotiation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note When auto negotiation is enabled the detected error 0x0C Object State Conflict is returned when attempting to set either e Forced Interface Speed or e Forced Duplex Mode Bit 1 Forced Duplex Mode if auto negotiation bit 0 0 half duplex 1 full duplex Forced Interface Speed UINT Valid values include 10000000 100000000 Note Attempting to set any other value returns the detected error 0x09 Invalid Attribute Value 10 16 Interface Label SHORT_S TRING A fixed textual string identifying the interface that should include internal for internal interfaces Maximum number of characters is 64 X supported not supported Services The Ethernet Link object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All x X 10 16 Set_Attribute_Single X 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x X 4C
15. STB NIC 2212 EtherNet IP network interface module STB PDT 3100 power distribution module STB DDI 3230 2 pt digital input module STB DDO 3200 2 pt digital output module STB DDI 3420 4 pt digital input module STB DDO 3410 4 pt digital output module STB DDI 3610 6 pt digital input module STB DDO 3600 6 pt digital output module STB AVI 1270 2 pt analog input module STB AVO 1250 2 pt analog output module e a PC running both Unity Pro version 5 0 or higher and Advantys configuration software version 5 0 or higher e an Ethernet managed switch that is connected to the both the controller and island by means of twisted pair Ethernet cable and RJ45 connectors S1A34009 10 2014 125 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Network Topology The Ethernet network devices used in this configuration include the following BMX P34 20302 PC with Unity Pro and Advantys controller 192 168 001 099 BMX NOC 0401 2 192 168 001 004 BMX CPS 2000 power supply __ Ethemet switch STB DDI 3610 STB NIC 2212 192 168 001 006 N Doe DDO 3600 JE STB PDT 3100 Ja STB AVI 1270 ower suppl 1 egy p PPY i a i STB AVO 1250 STB DDO an STB DDO 3410 STB DDI 3230 STB DDI 3420 To re create this example e use the IP addresses for your own configuration s e PC e BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module e STB NIC 2212 network interface module e check w
16. Step Action 1 In the Device Editor for the Ethernet communication module under the Device List node navigate to and select e for Modbus TCP devices the main device node e for EtherNet IP devices a connection node 2 For a Modbus TCP device open the Request Setting page and look for the Connection Bit number Properties Address Setting Request Setting Connection Bit Unit ID Health Time Out Repetitive Rate RD Address RD Length Last Value WR Address WR Length 0 255 1500 5392 18 Hold Value 1 Add Request Remove OK Cancel Apply In the above example which displays the left portion of a truncated Request Setting page the Connection Bit value of 0 maps to the first bit in the first byte of the HEALTH_BITS_IN array which can be represented as HEALTH BITS IN O 0 1A34009 10 2014 187 Working With Derived Data Types Step Action 3 For an EtherNet IP device open the Connection Settings page and look for the Connection Bit number Connection Settings Connection Information Parameter Value Connection Bit z 2 Request Packet Interval RPI 30 x4 Time out Multiplier Description OK Cancel Apply In the above example the Connection Bit value of 2 maps to the third bit in the first byte of the HEALTH_BITS_IN array which can be represented as HEALTH BITS IN 0 2 4 For a local slave open the local slave config
17. 02 Interface Flags DWORD Bit 0 Link Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 1 Duplex Mode 0 half duplex 1 full duplex Bits 2 4 Negotiation Status 3 successfully negotiated speed and duplex 4 forced speed and link Bit 5 Manual Setting Requires Reset 0 automatic 1 device need reset Bit 6 Local Hardware Fault detected 0 no event 1 event detected 03 03 Physical Address ARRAY of 6 USINT Module MAC Address X supported not supported 242 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 04 04 Interface Counters STRUCT X In octets UDINT Octets received on the interface In Ucast Packets UDINT Unicast packets received on the interface In NUcast Packets UDINT Non unicast packets received on the interface In Discards UDINT Inbound packets received on the interface but discarded In Errors UDINT Inbound packets that contain detected errors does not include In Discards In Unknown Protos UDINT Inbound packets with unknown protocol Out Octets UDINT Octets sent on the interface Out Ucast Packets UDINT Unicast packets sent on the interface Out NUcast Packets UDINT Non unicast packets sent on the interface Out Discards UDINT Outbound packets discarded Out Errors UDINT Outbound packets that contain detected errors X s
18. Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example each row represents a byte Because the items you create will be a 16 bit word each item consists of 2 rows In the Default Item Name Root input box type DDI3230_in_data Starting at the beginning of the table select the first two rows 0 and 1 Input bit Output Output bit Default Item Name Root Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name a ij DDI3230_in_data Define Item s Delete Item s i o Show Properties COMANODANDA WN COMNDAAR WHY il Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array 1A34009 10 2014 175 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 7 Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens xi New Item s Data Type z Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s v Item Name 32 char max DDI3230_in_data_IW0 com J ee NOTE The Define Item s button is enabled only when Input Mode is set to Manual 8 Select WORD as the New Item s Data Type then click OK A new item is created Input Input bit Output Output bit S Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root o o Mnn 2 2 3 3 4 4 Define Item s 5 5 6 6 Delete Item s 7 7 8 8 Show Properties 9 9
19. E F Clear IP The module applies its default IP address 1 The lower switch alone determines module behavior The upper switch is ignored 1A34009 10 2014 15 Installation Switch Labels The right side of the module displays two labels explaining the choice of rotary switch settings as depicted below upper switch Clear IP Stored Bootp lower switch LEDs The BMX NOC 0401 communication module presents the following LED indicators RUN running ERR detected error MS module status NS network status ETH STS Ethernet status In addition each Ethernet port presents the following two LED indicators e LNK link e ACT activity For a description of these LEDs and how to use them to diagnose the communication module refer to the topic LED Indicators for the Ethernet Communication Module see page 306 16 1A34009 10 2014 Installation Module Specifications Specifications BMX NOC 0401 specifications include Ports Communication Ports Four auto sensing 10 100Base T shielded twisted pair RJ 45 connector ports Electrical Bus Current Required 3 3V 550 mA Power Dissipation 1 9W Fuse None Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 C Humidity 0 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Altitude 2000 m 6561 68 ft Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 C Humidity 0 95 Rh non condensing 60
20. 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Property Description Set Password required by the SNMP agent before executing write commands from an SNMP manager Default public Trap Password an SNMP manager requires from the SNMP agent before the manager will accept trap notices from the agent Default public Security Enable Authentication Failure TRUE causes the SNMP agent to send a trap notification Trap message to the SNMP manager if an unauthorized manager sends a Get or Set command to the agent Default FALSE 1A34009 10 2014 83 Configuring Configuring Access Control Description Use the Access Control page to restrict access to the Ethernet communication module in its role as either a Modbus TCP or EtherNet IP server When access control is enabled in the Services page add the IP addresses of the following devices to the list of Authorized Addresses to permit communication with that device the Ethernet communication module itself so that the module can use EtherNet IP explicit messaging for any of the following purposes e obtaining diagnostic data e resetting the module e changing the IP address any client device that may send a request to the Ethernet communication module in its role as either Modbus TCP or EtherNet IP server your own maintenance PC so that you can communicate with the PLC via Unity Pro to configure and diagnose your application and to view the module s
21. Chapter 9 Diagnostics Overview This chapter describes methods of diagnosing the condition of the Ethernet communication module provided by the e Ethernet communication module hardware and e Unity Pro configuration software What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 9 1 Module Hardware Diagnostics 306 9 2 Unity Pro Software Diagnostics 308 9 3 CPU I O Block Diagnostics 332 S1A34009 10 2014 305 Diagnostics Section 9 1 Module Hardware Diagnostics LED Indicators for the BMX NOC 0401 LED Indicators The BMX NOC 0401 module displays the following indicators in the LED display area ETH STS The module also displays the following LED indicators next to each Ethernet port connector ACT LNK LED Descriptions Use the LED display to diagnose the state of the module as follows LED Color Description RUN Green e Off Indicates that the module is not communicating with the CPU over the backplane e Steady Green Indicates that the module has just been turned on and has not yet started the LED power up test or is communicating with the CPU over the backplane ERR Red e Off The module is operating normally e Blinking Red The module is not configured or the configuration is in progress or backplane communication has stopped e Steady Red The module has detected an event 306 1
22. Explicit Messaging Configuring the DataToSend Variable The DataToSend variable identifies the type of explicit message and the CIP request Variable Description Value hex DataToSend 0 CIP request service information 16 030E e High byte request size in words 16 03 3 decimal e Low byte service code 16 0E 14 decimal DataToSend 1 CIP request class information 16 0420 e High byte class 16 04 4 decimal e Low byte class segment 16 20 32 decimal DataToSend 2 CIP request instance information 16 6424 e High byte instance 16 64 100 decimal e Low byte instance segment 16 24 36 decimal DataToSend 3 CIP request attribute information 16 0330 e High byte attribute 16 03 3 decimal e Low byte attribute segment 16 30 48 decimal Viewing the Response Use a Unity Pro Animation table to display the ReceivedData variable array Note that the ReceivedData variable array consists of the entire data buffer To display the CIP response follow these steps Step Action 1 In Unity Pro select Tools Project Browser to open the Project Browser 2 In the Project Browser select the Animation Tables folder then click the right mouse button A pop up menu appears 3 Select New Animation Table in the pop up menu A new animation table and its properties dialog both open 4 In the Properties dialog edit the following values Name Type in a tab
23. On your keyboard press Enter The control bit for the third connection i e connection number 2 is toggled off 192 1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Effect of Activating and De activating Devices on I O MW Memory Addresses Introduction Unity Pro assigns a located address in MW memory to each input and output variable for a remote device and local slave when that device or slave is activated In addition Unity Pro removes from MW memory each located variable address whenever the related device or slave is de activated In each case because of the ordered structure of I O items in PLC memory see page 186 the activation and de activation of a single device causes a rippling effect on the address locations of other I O variables throughout the application Because activating and de activating devices can cause substantial changes to located variable addresses Schneider Electric recommends the following practices e Activate every device and local slave your application is likely to use and allow these devices to remain activated e f it subsequently becomes necessary to disable communications to a device or slave instead of de activating it use the appropriate control bits to toggle off all connections to that slave or device see page 191 e When configuring function blocks in Unity Pro instead of directly reassigning input and output pins to a specific MW address do the following as
24. ReqSize EN ENO ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 7 TCP MBS ADR RECP ReceivedData ActionType TYP DataToSend EMIS ManagParam GEST GEST ManagParam 1A34009 10 2014 295 Explicit Messaging Declaring Variables In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging configurations In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging configurations 101 x Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter T X Name M EDT M DDT M IoDDT Name Type Value Comment X ActionType INT 16 01 Transmission followed by await reception 1 DataToSend _ ARRAY 0 2 OF INT a a ia aia a 208 DataToSend 0 INT 16 1503 High byte of register address Function Code DataToSend 1 INT 16 000F High byte of number of registers to read Low byte of register address DataToSend 2 INT ____ 16 0001__ Not used Low byte of number of registers to read J ManagParam__ ARRAY 0 3 OF INT a L 6 ManagParam 0 INT High byte Exchange Low byte bit 1 activity bit 2 cancel ManagParam 1 INT Operation Report Communication Report ___ ManagParam 2 INT 2 Function block timeout 2 200 ms ___ ManagParam 3 INT __ 6 Length of DataToSend parameter i
25. Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array 110 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action Click the Define Item s button Result The Item Name Definition dialog opens Item Name Definintion x New Item s Data Type WORD ww Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s v Item Name 32 char max ProductionTotal_LineA e e Select WORD as the New Item s Data Type then click OK Result A new item is created Input Input bit Output Output bit J Offset Device Of set Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root ProductionTotal_LineA ProductionTotal_LineA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties SCOMNDOA WN K 1 E 2 i 3 a 4 o 5 6 o 7 a 8 9 0 xi Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply Click Apply to save the new items and leave the page open Repeat steps 2 6 for each new word item you need to create In this example that includes the following items e Rows 2 3 Default Items Name Root ProductionTotal_LineB e Rows 4 5 Default Items Name Root Events_LineA e Rows 6 7 Default Items Name Root Events_LineB Create output words 1A34009 10 2014 111 Configuring Creating Output Word Items
26. Sender Address Content of the From field in the last used Email header Recipient Address Content of the To field in the last used Email header Subject Content of the Subject field in the last used Email header Email Service Statistics Number of Emails Sent Total number of Emails sent and successfully acknowledged by the SMTP server Number of Responses from Email Server Total number of responses received from the SMTP server Number of Errors Total number of Emails that either could not be sent e were sent but were not successfully acknowledged by the SMTP server Last Error Hexadecimal code describing the reason for the last unsuccessful Email transmission see page 405 The value 0 indicates no unsuccessful transmissions Time elapses since last Email successfully sent sec Counts the number of seconds since the last Email was successfully sent Number of times link to the server down Number of times the SMTP server could not be reached Link checked every 30 minutes 384 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Network Time Service Diagnostics Diagnosing the Network Time Service Use the Network Time Service Diagnostic web page to display dynamically generated data describing the operation of the network time protocol NTP service that you configured in the Network Time Service page see page 97 in Unity Pro NOTE The Email service is enabled
27. Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic In the left pane of the Diagnostic window click on one of the following e for local slave diagnostics select the communication module node e for remote device connection diagnostics select a remote device connection 4 Depending upon you selection in step 3 above click on either the Local Slave Diagnostic tab or the EIP Connection Diagnostic tab to open that page 326 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Diagnostic Parameters This page displays the following diagnostic parameters for the selected local slave or connection Parameter Description Status see page 328 Input An integer representing input status Output An integer representing output status General An integer representing basic connection status Extended An integer representing extended connection status Counter Frame Error Increments each time a frame is not sent by missing resources or is impossible to send Time Out Increments each time a connection times out Refused Increments when connection is refused by the remote station Production Increments each time a message is produced Consumption Increments each time a message is consumed Production Byte Total of produced messages in bytes since the commun
28. The device obtains its IP address from the DHCP service provided by the Ethernet communication module and appears on the auto generated DHCP client list see page 77 e Disabled the default de activates the DHCP client in this device Select Enabled Identified by If DHCP for this Device is Enabled this indicates the device identifier type e MAC Address or e Device Name Select Device Name Identifier If DHCP for this Device is Enabled the specific device MAC Address or Name value Type in NIP2212_01 Mask The device subnet mask The default 255 255 255 0 Accept the default value Gateway The gateway address used to reach this device The default of 0 0 0 0 indicates this device is located on the same subnet as the Ethernet communication module Accept the default value Click Apply to save your edits and leave the window open for further edits The next step is to configure the connection between the communication module and the remote device 164 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring the Request Setting Page Use the Request Setting page to add configure and remove Modbus requests for the remote device Each request represents a separate link between the communication module and the remote device The Request Setting page for an STB NIP 2212 network interface module looks like this Properties Address Setting Requ
29. To create a new data template follow these steps Step Description 1 Confirm that Data Editor animation is OFF If necessary click the Stop animation a toolbar button Click the New table Df toolbar button The New table dialog opens New table Table name Type Modbus x Ok Cancel In the Table name field type in the name of the new data template Click Ok The new data template appears as a node in the data template list NOTE Save the new data template before performing any other task in the Data Editor Moving to another page or creating a new data template in the current page before saving your work deletes the new data template Saving a Data Template After you save a new data template you can re use it to view or modify its contents NOTE e Be careful when you modify and save a data template The last saved modification overwrites the pre existing data template even if the data template was originally created by someone other than yourself e Ifa data template is open for viewing by someone else your edits to that data template will be seen only when that person next accesses the Data Editor 1A34009 10 2014 361 Embedded Web Pages To save a new data template follow these steps Step Description 1 Click the Save toolbar button The Save application dialog opens Save application Password OK Cancel 2 In the Password field type
30. e Increase the RPI setting for a device where possible e Add another communication module to act as an I O scanner and re design the network in order to share the load Network Load and Network Bandwidth Network Load measured in number of packets can be estimated as the sum of the Device Load of the adapter devices or of the scanner devices Network Bandwidth measured in bits can be estimated as the sum of the Device Bandwidth of the adapter devices or of the scanner devices NOTE Schneider Electric recommends that Network Load not exceed 90 of maximum network bandwidth If necessary you may need to optimize your control application design by adjusting device RPI settings e changing connection types e g from direct to rack optimized e modify the configuration e change the network topology 1A34009 10 2014 219 Optimizing Performance Estimating Message Traverse and Response Times Message Traverse Time Message Traverse Time is defined as the time required for a message to travel from its point of origin to its targeted destination over a network path As the messages travels over the network path it may pass through and be forwarded by a number of intermediate network devices including switches and routers Message Traverse Time is impacted by several factors including for example the following e the number of forwarding network devices e the transmission delay of each forwarding device
31. 1 0 Module Module Capacity The maximum number of packets that the module can process in packets per second Module Utilization The percentage of communication module capacity being used by the application The background color of the value changes depending on the percentage utilization Messaging Client EtherNet IP activity The number of I O messages sent by the module using the EtherNet IP protocol since last reset in packets per second Modbus TCP activity The number of I O messages sent by the module using the Modbus TCP protocol since last reset in packets per second Messaging Server EtherNet IP activity The number of I O messages received by the module using the EtherNet IP protocol since last reset in packets per second Modbus TCP activity The number of I O messages received by the module using the Modbus TCP protocol since last reset in packets per second 374 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Scanner Status Introduction The Scanner Status web page displays read only data describing the current state of the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module in its role as I O scanner Scanner Status Display The top of the page displays the following general diagnostic information about the scanner e O scanning status e Avalue of Operational indicates that the values in the Scanner Status grid are reporting the state of
32. 3 EtherNet IP connections NOTE The initial value of this EtherNet IP connection is 1 because only a single local slave has previously been enabled When a single Modbus TCP connection is created the value of this connection bit offset changes to 2 Request Packet The refresh period for this connection from 2 to 65535 ms Interval RPI Default 12 ms Type in 30 ms NOTE This parameter can be set in the DTM for the communication module or the remote device Time out Multiplier This setting multiplied against the RPI produces a value that triggers an inactivity timeout Setting selections include x4 x8 x16 x32 x64 x128 x256 and x512 Accept the default of x4 NOTE The Connection Information page is read only when the communication module is selected This information needs to be set in the DTM for the remote device Click OK to save your settings S1A34009 10 2014 135 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring Connection Settings in the Remote Device DTM Connections between a communication module and remote device can be created and edited in the DTM for the remote device In this example the following configuration edits are made to the connection that Unity Pro automatically created when the remote device was added to the project Use settings that are appropriate for your actual application Step Action
33. Adding a Power Supply to the New Unity Pro Project When you added the CPU to the project above Unity Pro may also have added a power supply to the project If not the next step is to manually add a power supply to your Unity Pro project Step Action 7 In the Project Browser double click 0 PLC bus Unity Pro displays both the e Local Bus window with the selected CPU in the second position and e Hardware catalog displaying the Local Bus tab below Hardware catalog E xi Modicon M340 local drop Analog Communication Counting Discrete Motion Rack Supply Local Bus In the Hardware catalog under the Supply node use your mouse to select then drag a BMX CPS 2000 power supply to the first position in the rack mi PLC Bus BT Bus J 0 BMX P34 20302 02 40 7 CPS 2000 In the File menu select Save to save your edits NOTE Schneider Electric recommends that you periodically save your changes as you make edits 1A34009 10 2014 33 Configuring Adding an Ethernet Communication Module to the New Unity Pro Project Next add an Ethernet communication module to your project Step Action 10 Returning to the Hardware catalog under the Communication node use your mouse to select then drag a BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module to an open slot in the rack in this example slot 2 NOTE You can select the BMX NO
34. NIP2212_01 I x General Device Information DTM Information Protocol Information m DTM name management Alias name NIP2212_01 Tag name _ Default I O vision management Default input I O vision Variable name NIP2212_01_IN Default output I O vision Variable name NIP2212_01_OUT When you edit the Alias name Unity Pro applies it as the base name for both structure and variable names NOTE No additional editing needs to be performed in the pages of this window Except for the Alias name field parameters are read only Click OK Unity Pro adds the new STB NIP 2212 network interface module to the DTM Browser beneath the communication module Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to save your configuration edits The next step is to configure the device you have just added to the project 160 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring STB NIP 2212 Properties Overview Use the pages of the Device Editor to view and edit settings for a remote device To edit the device settings disconnect the DTM from the remote device see page 46 To display the DTM settings for a remote device select the device name which is found under the Device List node in the left pane of the Device Editor For the purposes of this example which configures an STB NIP 2212 network interface mo
35. NOCOI INE T NOCOT IN AMW 3 HEALTH BITS_IN ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE MW1 NIP2212_01_IN T_NIP2212_01_IN YMW17 NOCO01_LS1_IN T_NOCO1_LS1_IN MW35 NIC2212_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_IN MW39 NOC01_OUT T_NOCO1_OUT MW101 B CONTROL BITS OUT ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE MW101 NIP2212 01 OUT S T_NIP2212 01 OUT MW117 NOC01_LS1_OUT T_NOCO1_LS1_OUT MW122 T_NIC2212_01_OUT MW123 Note the order of inputs and outputs in the above example Recall that the user defines the size and location of inputs and outputs see page 36 However within the reserved area for both inputs and outputs Unity Pro assigns addresses to variables in the following order Inputs Order Outputs Health bits 1 1 Control bits 1 Modbus TCP input variables 2 2 Modbus TCP output variables 2 Local Slave input variables 3 Local Slave output variables 3 EtherNet IP input variables 2 4 EtherNet IP output variables 2 1 Health and control bits are sub ordered as follows i by device type a Modbus TCP b local slave c EtherNet IP ii within each device type a by device or local slave number b within a device by connection number 2 Device variables are sub ordered as follows i by device number ii within a device by connection number iii within a connection by item offset 3 Local slave variables are sub ordered as follows i by local slave number ii within each local slave by item offset
36. Number of words to read e High byte attribute 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte attribute segment 16 01 1 decimal 16 0001 Viewing the Response Use a Unity Pro Animation table to display the ReceivedData variable array Note that the ReceivedData variable array consists of the entire data buffer To display the CIP response follow these steps Step Action 1 In Unity Pro select Tools Project Browser to open the Project Browser 2 In the Project Browser select the Animation Tables folder then click the right mouse button A pop up menu appears 3 Select New Animation Table in the pop up menu A new animation table and its properties dialog both open 4 In the Properties dialog edit the following values Name Type in a table name For this example ReceivedData Functional module Accept the default lt None gt Comment Optional Type your comment here Number of animated characters words Type in 49 representing the size of the data buffer in 1A34009 10 2014 285 Explicit Messaging Step Action 5 The completed Properties dialog looks like this Properties x Name Functional module ReceivedData jNone gt Comment Extended String Animation Number of animated characters 49 range 20 300 Cancel Click OK to close the dialog In the animation table s Name
37. Unity Pro filters the content of the Add dialog so that it displays only DTMs that are compatible with the selected DTM selected Delete If the selected DTM allows this function this deletes the selected DTM and its sub node DTMs from the DTM connectivity tree Deletion from the DTM connectivity tree does not affect the DTM s link to the I O scanning table Field Bus This scans the connected physical devices to create the corresponding Discovery field bus topology Refer to the Field Bus Discovery Service topic Connect This connects the DTM see page 46 to its physical device on the network This connection does not depend on the PLC online offline status of the Unity Pro project application NOTE Connecting a gateway or device DTM implicitly connects its parent DTM Disconnect This disconnects the DTM see page 46 from its physical device This disconnection depends on the PLC online offline status of the Unity Pro project application NOTE Disconnecting a gateway or device DTM implicitly disconnects its parent DTM Load data from device This loads data from the physical device on the network to the DTM Store data to 1 This loads data from the DTM to the physical device on the network device Copy This command is disabled Paste This command is disabled Device menu This command opens a sub menu that contains device specific commands as determined by the device vendor For
38. e EIP Connection Diagnostic page to display I O status and production consumption information for a connection of a remote EtherNet IP device Use the Refresh Every 500ms checkbox to display static or dynamic data as follows When the checkbox is This page Selected e Displays data that is dynamically updated every 500 ms and e Increments the number at the top of the table each time data is refreshed De selected e Displays static data and e Does not Increment the number at the top of the table which instead displays a constant value NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the communication module or remote device DTM to the physical module or device To do this select the appropriate node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect 1A34009 10 2014 325 Diagnostics The following figure presents an example of the EIP Connection Diagnostic page Except for the title the Local Slave Diagnostic page is the same EIP Connection Diagnostic I O Values Group Parameter Refresh Every 500ms 0 B Status A Input e Counter amp Frame Error a t Refused z Production Consumption Production Byte Consumption Byte Theoretical Packet s Real Packet s Diagnostic Production Connection ID Consumption Connection ID O gt T API 3 D O SOnooo00c0 000 ESEDEDEDESEDE DES jo EBEDES Description To open this page
39. for the service or services oO an A Click e Apply to save the changes and keep the window or e OK to save the changes and close the window The edits do not take effect until they are successfully downloaded from your PC to the CPU and from the CPU to the communication modules and network devices 100 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Section 2 7 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Module as an EtherNet IP Adapter Overview This section describes how to configure the Ethernet communication module to act as an EtherNet IP adapter using a functionality called Local Slave The communication module supports up to three instances of local slaves In its role as a EtherNet IP adapter the module initiates no messages Instead it responds to e implicit messaging requests from a scanner device in the network and e explicit messaging requests directed to the communication module s assembly object see page 231 from other devices on the network NOTE If no local slave instance is enabled the communication module can respond to explicit messaging requests directed at its CIP objects see page 227 other than the assembly object What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing the Local Slave 102 Configuring a Local Slave 104 Local Slave Inputs and Outputs 109 1A34009 10 2014 101 Configu
40. or row to a data template the paste command will overwrite item data in the selected row To insert a copied row between existing rows first use the New command to create an empty row then paste the copied data into the new row Delete Deletes the selected data template from the list or the selected item from the data template Change password Opens the Change password dialog where you can change the Data Editor Write see page 350 password NOTE The Data Editor Write password can also be changed in the Setup Security web page Read PLC symbols Loads the existing Unity Pro symbol or variable names into the Lookup Variable dialog Variables that have been loaded into this dialog can be added to the currently open data template Start animation Starts the dynamic display of value and status for the items contained in the selected data template NOTE The Start animation icon is visible only when animation is turned OFF Stop animation Stops the dynamic display of value and status for the items contained in the selected data template NOTE The Stop animation icon is visible only when animation is turned ON Rate The refresh rate of the dynamic display of data template items in milliseconds IP address The IP address of the Ethernet communication module and its embedded web server Data Template List The data template list displays a node for each data temp
41. select a communication module then click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 3 In the pop up menu select Device menu Remove EDS from library The following window opens B EDS Deletion from Device Library T x E gt EtherNet IP gt Display All EDS x Sort by File Name 7 Displayed Name Product Name 7 Device Library H A EtherNet IP Devices H Chassis a Modules Delete Selected File s View Selected File s Close Help Zi 122 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action Use the selection lists in the heading of this window to specify how EDS files will be displayed Display Filters the list of displayed EDS files select e All EDS no filtering e Only Devices e Only Chassis e Only Modules Sort by Sorts the list of displayed EDS files select File Name e Manufacturer e Category e Device Name Displayed Name The description displayed for each device select e Catalog Name e Product Name In the Device Library tree control navigate to and select the EDS file you want to remove Optional Click the View Selected File button to display the read only contents of the selected EDS file Click the Delete Selected File button A message box opens Click Yes to remove the selected EDS file from the list When you have finished removing EDS files click Close 10 The n
42. the protocol type the three character string CIP Configuring the Data_to_Send Parameter The Data_to_ Send parameter varies in size It consists of contiguous registers that include in sequence both the message type and the CIP request size of Data_to_Send minus 2 Offset words Length bytes Data Type Description 0 2 bytes Bytes Message type e High byte size of the request in words e Low byte EtherNet IP service code 1 Management _Param 3 Bytes The CIP request NOTE The structure and size of the CIP request depends on the EtherNet IP service 1 Structure the CIP request in little endian order 1A34009 10 2014 277 Explicit Messaging Contents of the Received_Data Parameter The Received Data parameter contains only the CIP response The length of the CIP response varies and is reported by Management _Param 3 after the response is received The format of the CIP response is described below Offset Length bytes Data Type Description words 0 2 Byte e High byte MSB reserved e Low byte LSB reply service 1 2 Byte High byte MSB length of additional status e Low byte LSB EtherNet IP general status see page 399 2 length of additional status Byte array Additional Status Management_Param 3 Byte array Response data size of Received_Data minus 4 and minus the additional status length 1 Refer to The CIP
43. 1A34009 05 Modicon M340 BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet Communication Module User Manual 10 2014 Schneider Electric www schneider electric com The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When devices are used for applications with technical safety req
44. 8000 bits I O Scanner D 2 50 ms 8000 bits For the purposes of this example it is also assumed that every connection is bi directional I O Scanner Calculations The Ethernet communication module acting as local I O scanner has to handle the implicit messaging load contributed by the remote devices Your task is to 1 estimate the implicit messaging load and bandwidth contributed by each remote device 2 sum the load and bandwidth values for each remote device 3 compare the total load and bandwidth against the maximum implicit messaging capacity of the local I O scanner Recall that the implicit messaging load calculation formula for a single remote device is Load number of packets per connection x number of connections RPI Because every connection is assumed to be bi directional the number of packets per connection value is 2 Consequently the estimated implicit messaging load contributed by each device and the total implicit messaging load the local I O scanner has to handle can be estimated as follows Load Device Number of X Number of RPI Load packets per connections connection I O Adapter A 2 xX 5 20ms 500 pps I O Adapter B 2 xX 2 30 ms 134 pps I O Drive C 2 X 2 30 ms 134 pps I O Scanner D 2 X 2 50ms 80 pps Total 848 pps Switch 848 pps 224 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance
45. A A d ReceivedData 12 16 0000 Note Each array entry presents 2 bytes of data in little endi an format where the least significant byte is stored in the smallest memory address For example 8E in word 0 is the lower byte and 00 is the upper byte 282 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Modbus Object Overview The following unconnected explicit messaging example shows you how to use the DATA EXCH function block to read data from a remote device in this case an STB NIC 2212 network interface module at IP address 192 168 1 6 using the Read_Holding_Registers service of the Modbus Object You can perform the same explicit messaging service using the EtherNet IP Explicit Message window of the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool see page 300 Implementing the DATA_EXCH Function Block To implement the DATA EXCH function block you need to create and assign variables for the following blocks ManagParam 0 0 ReqSize ManagParam 3 DATA_EXCH 2 ManagParam 0 0 0 and ManagParam 3 ReqSize EN ENO ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP ADR RECP ReceivedData ActionType TYP DataToSend EMIS ManagParam GEST GEST ManagParam 1A34009 10 2014 283 Explicit Messaging Declaring Variables In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging
46. ASCII characters time day_hr_min_sec_ms date YYYY MM DD or HH MM SS Status Contains messages describing the status of communication with the symbol variable or direct address if communication is The status message reads OK normal if communication is The status field displays a system message interrupted describing the interruption Configuration Area Open and close the configuration area by double clicking on a row in the data template The configuration area will display the configuration settings for the selected row Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to move between rows in the data template and display their settings in the configuration area Use the configuration area when data template animation is turned OFF to e create a new data template see page 361 e display the items contained in an existing data template see page 362 e add items to a data template including e inserting a symbol see page 363 or variable to a data template e inserting a direct address see page 363 to a data template Use the configuration area when data template animation is turned ON to write data to read write application variables Refer to the topic Working With Data Templates for more information on how to use the controls in the configuration area 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Working With Data Templates Creating a Data Template To display and access application data first create a data template
47. B 2 o Rate 500 IP address 192 168 1 4 Empty Symbol Address Datatype Value Format Status 2 Symbol ia Address Type x 4 Format x Value Read only Apply Reset 1 Toolbar 2 Data template list 3 Data template 4 Configuration Area Toolbar The Data Editor toolbar presents the following features Command or Field Icon Description New Ej Ifa node in the data template list is selected this command opens the New table dialog for the creation of a new data template The new data template is inserted below the selected node f a row in the currently open data template is selected this command inserts a new row below the selected row Save Saves changes made to both the data template list and each data template Copy Ifa node in the data template list is selected this command copies the selected data template e Ifan item or row in the currently open data template is selected this command to copies the selected item 1A34009 10 2014 357 Embedded Web Pages Command or Field Icon Description Paste e Ifthe root or Empty node is selected in the data template list this command pastes a previously copied data template into the list e ifan empty item or row in the currently open data template is selected this command pastes a previously copied item into the data template item at the selected row NOTE When adding a copied item
48. C Altitude 3000 m 9842 52 ft transport Software Compatibility The Ethernet communication module is compatible with Unity Pro programming software version 5 0 and later Standards The Ethernet communication module complies with the following standards UL 508 CSA 22 2 142 CSA 22 2 213 CE EMI EN5501 1 EN61131 2 1IEC61131 2 IEEE 802 3 2002 ODVA 1A34009 10 2014 17 Installation Communication Modules per Station The maximum number of communication modules including but not limited to BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication modules you can install in a single station is determined by the CPU serving that station CPU Maximum Number of Communication Modules per Station BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 2000 BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 20102 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 BMX P34 20302 www wl w ww v N NOTE If you use the embedded Ethernet port with the BMX P34 2 copro the maximum number of communication modules per station is 2 18 1A34009 10 2014 Installation Communication Specifications Introduction The following specifications describe both the I O communication and the explicit messaging capacities of the BMX NOC 0401 I O Communication Specifications The Ethernet communication module presents the following I O communication features Communication type Feature Capacity EtherNet IP CIP Implicit Messaging Scanner Maximum nu
49. Configuring Service Descriptions The Ethernet communication module can be configured to provide the following services This service Enables the module to Configurable in SNMP serve as an SNMP v1 agent e provide trap information to up to two devices configured as SNMP managers NOTE The SNMP service is enabled by default and cannot be disabled not editable Access Control deny access to the Ethernet communication module from unauthorized devices Device Editor Address Server provide both IP addressing parameters and operating parameters to other Ethernet devices Device Editor QoS Tagging add Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP tags to Ethernet packets so that network switches can prioritize the transmission and forwarding of Ethernet packets NOTE Before enabling QoS tagging confirm that devices connected to the Ethernet communication module support QoS tagging Device Editor 1 0 Communication Control allow the Unity Pro application to control the enabling and disabling of individual connections between the communication module and remote I O devices NOTE e The application can open and close individual connections using the control bits located at the beginning of the output area e If this service is disabled the user via the application program cannot toggle on and off connection control bits Device Editor RSTP employ the rapid s
50. Description Configuration Mode Options Gateway The address of a device if any that serves as a gateway e Static Address to the communication module Name The device name e DHCP Selecting a Configuration Mode Use the Configuration list to specify a configuration mode The configuration mode setting determines how the communication module obtains its IP address at startup Choices are Configuration Mode Description Static and sub network mask configured in this page The module uses the scanner IP address gateway IP address Flash Memory The module uses the IP address configured via the TCP IP object and stored flash memory An IP address configured by this process survives both a warm and a cold re start BOOTP The module uses an IP address assigned by a BOOTP server DHCP The module uses an IP address assigned by a DHCP server Default Address Configurations The communication module uses a default address configuration when it is not configured or when a duplicate IP address is detected The default address is based on the MAC address of the module and makes it possible for several Schneider Electric devices to use their default network configuration on the same network The module uses the following default address configurations e Default IP Address This default address starts with 10 10 and uses the last two bytes of the MAC address As an example a device with the MAC addre
51. Detected error in Forward_Close service connection path 16 8147 Scheduling not specified 16 8148 Link address to self invalid 16 8149 Secondary resources unavailable 16 814A Rack connection already established 16 814B Module connection already established 16 814C Miscellaneous 16 814D Redundant connection mismatch 16 814E No more user configurable link consumer resources the configured number of resources for a producing application has reached the limit 16 814F No more user configurable link consumer resources there are no consumers configured for a producing application to use 16 8160 Vendor specific 16 8170 No target application data available 16 8171 No originator application data available 16 8173 Not configured for off subnet multicast 16 81A0 Detected error in data assignment 16 81B0 Optional object state detected error 1A34009 10 2014 393 Detected Error Codes Detected Description Error Code 16 81C0 Optional device state detected error Note All 16 82xx detected errors are register session response detected errors 16 8200 Target device does not have sufficient resources 16 8208 Target device does not recognize message encapsulation header 16 820F Reserved or unknown detected error from target 394 1A34009 10 2014 Detected Error Codes Explicit Messaging Communication and Operation Reports Overview Communication and operation reports are part of t
52. Explicit Messaging Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Function Codes Overview You can execute Modbus TCP explicit messages using either a Unity Pro DATA 1 EXCH function block or the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool s Modbus Explicit Message Window NOTE Configuration edits made to an Ethernet communication module from the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool are not saved to the operating parameters stored in the CPU and therefore are not sent by the CPU to the module on startup Function Codes The function codes supported by the Unity Pro graphical user interface include the following standard explicit messaging functions Function Code dec Description 1 Read bits M 2 Read input bits l 3 Read words MW 4 Read input words IW 15 Write bits M 16 Write words MW NOTE You can use the DATA 1 EXCH function block to execute any Modbus function via program logic Because the available function codes are too numerous to list here refer instead to the Modbus IDA website for more information about these Modbus functions at NOTE _http Awww Modbus org 292 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH Introduction When you use the DATA _EXCH block to create an explicit message for a Modbus TCP device configure this block the same way you would configure it for any other Modbus communica
53. In the Online Action window select the device you want to ping The window displays pages containing online information for the selected device NOTE The specific collection of displayed pages depends on the type of device selected e the communication module aremote EtherNet IP device aremote Modbus TCP device Select the Ping page To send a single ping de select the Repeat checkbox a series of pings 1 every 100 ms select Repeat checkbox Optional Select Stop on Error to stop pinging an unsuccessful communication Click Ping once to begin pinging Click Ping a second time to stop repeated pinging where no error has been detected The Ping Result box displays the ping outcome Click Clear to empty the Ping Result box 1A34009 10 2014 265 Online Action Viewing and Editing Online Settings for a Remote Device Introduction Use the Online Parameters window to e view the remote device s default parameter settings e view the remote device s current parameter settings e edit and download to the remote device its editable parameter settings Parameter setting edits transmitted from this page are sent as EtherNet IP explicit messages and employ the Address and Messaging settings configured in the EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging window NOTE Before you can view and edit online settings for a remote device connect its DTM file to the physical device To do this
54. Instance Selection dialog navigate to and select the entire HEALTH BITS_IN array Animation Table Instance Selection x NOC01_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN Variables Function Blocks T X Name f MEDT DDT M IODDT EE A Comment m NIC2212_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_IN i NIC2212_01_O0UT T_NIC2212_01_OUT H NIP2212_01_IN T_NIP2212_01_IN H NIP2212_01_OUT T_NIP2212_01_OUT NOC01_IN T_NOCO1_IN fa HEALTH _BITS_IN ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE i NOC01_LS1_IN T_NOC01_LS1_IN H NOC01_LS1_OUT T_NOC01_LS1_OUT E _NOC01_OUT T_NOC01_OUT 7 Click OK to add the array to the Connection_Health_Bits animation table Connection_Health_Bits H lol x aB NOCO1_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE NOC01_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN 0 BYTE NOCO1_IN HEALTH BITS _INTi BYTE NOCO1_IN HEALTH BITS IN 2 BYTE NOC01_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN 4 BYTE NOC01_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN 5 BYTE NOCO1_IN HEALTH_BITS_IN 3 BYTE Keep in mind that each row represents a byte which contains eight individual connection health bits When the DTM for the Ethernet communication module is connected to the physical module the Value field displays a value for the entire byte 190 S1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Modifying Connection Control Bits in an Animation Table You can also use an animation table to modify the value of a control bit toggling it on or off NOTE Using control bits to toggle a connection o
55. Modbus TCP Traffic DSCP Value for I O Messages DSCP Value for Explicit Messages r Network Time Protocol Traffic 47 27 55 DSCP Value for I O Data High Priority Messages 43 31 7 27 59 DSCP Value for Network Time Protocol Messages 0k _ cancel __Appy The QoS Page for the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet Communication Module The following QoS page displays the default values for the BMX NOC 0401 module displays when operating in Advanced Mode Use Value from Configuration x Type of Traffic DSCP Value for I O Data Urgent Priority Messages EtherNet IP 55 DSCP Value for I O Data Scheduled Priority Messages EtherNet IP 47 DSCP Value for I O Data High Priority Messages Modbus TCP EtherNet IP 43 DSCP Value for I O Data Low Priority Messages EtherNet IP 31 DSCP Value for Explicit Message Modbus TCP EtherNet IP 27 OK Cancel Apply S1A34009 10 2014 87 Configuring Specifying the Source of QoS Settings The five QoS prioritization values can be set either from the communication module s flash memory or in this page To specify the QoS configuration source set the Use value from field to either Setting Description Configuration The communication module uses the settings input in the Type of Traffic section of this page Flash The communication module uses the settings saved in the module s flash memory The fields
56. Networks Library Volume 1 Common Industrial Protocol at section 3 5 6 Connection Manager Object Instance Error Codes NOTE The response is structured in little endian order Checking the Received_Data Response for System and CIP Status Use the contents of the Received_Data parameter to check both the system status and the CIP status of the Ethernet communication module when handling the explicit message First Check the value of the high byte MSB of the first response word positioned at offset 0 If the value of this byte is e equal to 0 the system properly handled the explicit message e not equal to 0 a system based event occurred Refer to the list of EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Event Codes see page 392 for an explanation of the system based event code contained in the second response word positioned at offset 1 Next If the system properly handled the explicit message and the high byte of the first response word equals 0 check the value of the second response word positioned at offset 1 If the value of this word is e equal to 0 the explicit message was properly handled by the CIP protocol e not equal to 0 a CIP protocol based event occurred Refer to your CIP documentation for an explanation of the CIP status displayed in this word 278 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Get_Attribute_Single Overview The following unconnected explicit messaging example shows yo
57. Program Animation Tables Operator Screens Documentation 2 The Data Editor opens displaying the Variables page iix Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter T Name F O EDT MDT FloppT S NIC2272_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_IN ZNIW39 JA NIC2212_01_OUT T_NIC2212_01_OUT MW123 H89 NIP2212_01_IN T_NIP2212_01_IN MW17 SA NIP2212_01_OUT T_NIP2212_01_OUT MW117 H8 NOCO1_IN T_NOCO1_IN MW1 H89 NOCO1_LS7_IN T_NOCO1_LS1_IN MW35 S NOCO1_LS1_OUT T_NOCO1_LS1_OUT Mw122 H 8 NOCO1_OUT T_NOCO1_OUT MW101 gt NOTE e A check mark appears in the DDT checkbox If not select the DDT checkbox to display these variables e The red arrow and lock icons indicate the variable name was auto generated by Unity Pro based on the configuration of the local slave or remote device and cannot be edited 1A34009 10 2014 185 Working With Derived Data Types Displaying the Order of Input and Output Items in PLC Memory The Data Editor displays the address of each input and output variable Click once on the Address column header to sort input and output addresses in ascending order When you open the first input and output variables you can see both the connection health bits and the connection control bits 2 Data Editor a 0 x Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types ies _T X Name F EDT MDDT FIODDT
58. Service 48 Device Editor 52 Configuring Properties in the Device Editor 54 Uploading and Downloading DTM Based Applications 56 1A34009 10 2014 39 Configuring DTM Browser Overview The DTM Browser displays a hierarchical list of DT Ms in the form of nodes on a connectivity tree that have been added to your Unity Pro project Each DTM node represents an actual module or device in your Ethernet network DTM Browser e x amp Host PC o E lt 192 168 1 4 gt NOCO1 EA lt EtherNet IP 192 168 1 6 gt NIC2212_01 B lt Modbus 192 168 1 7 gt NIP2212_01 Node Types There are 3 types of DTM nodes e Communication DTMs e Any COM DTM can be plugged directly under the root node Host PC at the 1st level e ACOM DTM can support Gateway DTMs or Device DTMs as children if their protocols are compatible e Gateway DTMs e A Gateway DTM can support other Gateway DTMs or Device DTMs as children if their protocols are compatible e Device DTMs e A Device DTM does not support any child DTMs Node Names Each DTM has a default name when inserted into the browser The default name consists of the following elements lt Channel Address gt Device Name Where Element Description channel This is the name of the channel communication media to which the device is plugged in This name is read from the DTM and is set by the device vendor Example EtherNet IP Modbus address The bus address of the dev
59. Slave 0000 0c eee eee 104 Local Slave Inputs and Outputs naana nananana 109 Chapter 3 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network 115 3 1 Hardware Catalog 000 ccc eee 116 Adding a DTM to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 117 Add an EDS File to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 118 Updating the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 0 4 120 Remove an EDS File from the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 122 3 2 Adding an EtherNet IP Device to the Network 124 Setting Up Your Network 0000020 eee ees 125 Adding an STB NIC 2212 Remote Device 127 Configuring STB NIC 2212 Properties 000000 129 Configuring EtherNet IP Connections 0 0000 eee 134 Connecting to the Advantys STB Island 0000 139 Configuring I O Items 0 0 ee 143 3 3 Adding a Modbus TCP Device to the Network 156 Setting Up Your Network 0 0000000 eee eee 157 Adding an STB NIP 2212 Remote Device 5 159 Configuring STB NIP 2212 Properties 0 000 eee 161 Connecting to the Advantys STB Island 00 167 Configuring I O Items 0 00 00 ees 171 Chapter 4 Working With Derived Data Types 181 Creating and Updating Derived Data Types 182 Working with Derived Data Type Variables 184 Eff
60. The response timeout can be configured using the EM Request Timeout parameter located in the Channel Properties EtherNet IP page Implicit Messages Implicit messages consist of packets of data that are time critical Implicit messages are used for real time control and synchronization Examples of implicit messages include real time I O data motion control data functional diagnostic data real time synchronization data and network topology management data Implicit messages require determinism and high performance in message processing and delivery The characteristics of implicit messaging are producer consumer mode EtherNet IP or client server mode Modbus TCP small fixed data size fixed frequency short response time short connection timeout 210 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Message Connection Types Introduction The transmission of most messages require a point to point connection between a transmitter and receiver For all types of explicit messages the connection automatically closes when the communication ends or is timed out For implicit messages keep the connection open If the I O connection CIP for EtherNet IP TCP for Modbus TCP the transmission stops In this case the scanner employs the TCP implicit messaging connection to dynamically re establish the CIP connection Calculating the Connection Timeout For CIP connections you can control the connection timeout setting b
61. To create output items for local slave 01 Step Action 1 Click the Output tab to open the following page Input Input bit Output Output bit l _ Default Item Name Root _ BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name 0 Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example each row represents a byte Because the only item you will create is a 16 bit word you will select 2 rows In the Default Item Name Root input box type DataReceived Starting at the beginning of the table select the first 2 rows 0 and 1 Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root DataReceived Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 112 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action 4 Click the Define Item s button Result The Item Name Definition dialog opens xi New Item s Data Type z Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s M Item Name 32 char max DataReceived om j ooe 5 Select WORD as the New Item s Data Type then click OK Result A new item is create
62. aa awe 227 Identity Object eci coed ebes eh chook aed aed 229 Assembly Object 4ecscc2e crake aw pears enenee eee eee kee 231 Connection Manager Object 0 0 cee eee 233 Modbus Object reese nmen cada cs Pee ee ee eke Phe de eA SX 235 Quality Of Service QOS Object 00 e eee 237 TCP IP Interface Object 00 0060 eee 239 Ethernet Link Object 00 2000 cece eee eee 241 EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics Object 000 246 EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics Object 249 IO Connection Diagnostics Object 0 0 eee eee 251 EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics Object 255 EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics List Object 257 1A34009 10 2014 5 Chapter 7 Online Action 2222020200005 259 Accessing CIP Objects 2 5 e0s 20000 bere ea eee eee bees 260 Editing Port Configuration Properties for Remote EtherNet IP Devices 262 Pinging a Network Device 0 000 c cece eee eee 264 Viewing and Editing Online Settings fora Remote Device 266 Chapter 8 Explicit Messaging 0 cece eee eee 269 8 1 Explicit Messaging Using the DATA_EXCH Block 270 Configuring Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 271 Configuring the DATA_EXCH Management Parameter 273 8 2 EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_LEXCH 274 Explicit Messaging S
63. address 16 0F 15 decimal DataToSend 2 CIP request instance information 16 0001 e High byte not used 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte Least significant byte LSB of the number of registers to read 16 01 1 decimal Viewing the Response Use a Unity Pro Animation table to display the ReceivedData variable array Note that the ReceivedData variable array consists of the entire data buffer To display the Modbus TCP response follow these steps Step Action 1 In Unity Pro select Tools Project Browser to open the Project Browser 2 In the Project Browser select the Animation Tables folder then click the right mouse button A pop up menu appears 3 Select New Animation Table in the pop up menu A new animation table and its properties dialog both open 4 In the Properties dialog edit the following values Name Type in a table name For this example ReceivedData Functional module Accept the default lt None gt Comment Optional Type your comment here Number of animated Type in 100 representing the size of the data buffer in characters words 1A34009 10 2014 297 Explicit Messaging Step Action 5 The completed Properties dialog looks like this Name Functional module ReceivedData f None gt Comment Extended String Animation Number of animated characters 100 range 20 300 ma Click OK t
64. an Ethernet Network NOTE When you create items align items of data type WORD and DWORD as follows e WORD items align these items on a 16 bit boundary DWORD items align these items on a 32 bit boundary This process yields the following tables of input and output data Input Data Advantys Fieldbus Image Unity Pro EIP Items STB Module Description Word Bit s Byte Bit s 1 0 15 0 0 7 NIC 2212 low byte status 1 0 7 high byte status 2 0 1 2 0 1 DDI 3230 input data 2 3 2 3 DDI 3230 input status 4 5 4 5 DDO 3200 output data echo 6 7 6 7 DDO 3200 output status 8 11 3 0 3 DDI 3420 input data 12 15 4 7 DDI 3420 input status 3 0 3 4 0 3 DDO 3410 output data echo 4 7 4 7 DDO 3410 output status 8 13 5 0 5 DDI 3610 input data 14 15 6 7 NA not used 4 0 5 6 0 5 DDI 3610 input status 6 7 6 7 NA not used 8 13 7 0 5 DDO 3600 output data echo 14 15 6 7 NA not used 5 0 5 8 0 5 DDO 3600 output status 6 15 8 6 7 NA not used 9 0 7 6 0 15 10 0 7 AVI 1270 input data ch 1 11 0 7 7 0 7 12 0 7 AVI 1270 input status ch 1 8 15 13 0 7 NA not used 8 0 15 14 0 7 AVI 1270 input data ch 2 15 0 7 9 0 7 16 0 7 AVI 1270 input status ch 2 8 15 17 0 7 AVO 1250 output status ch 1 144 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network
65. and Target CIP Connections UINT Increments when a connection Timeout Errors times out Originator and Target Max EIP TCP UINT Number of TCP connections used Connections opened for EIP as client or server opened since the last reset Current EIP TCP UINT Number of TCP connections used Connections for EIP as client or server currently open 03 IO Messaging STRUCT X X Diagnostics IO Production Counter UDINT Increments each time a Class 0 1 message is sent IO Consumption UDINT Increments each time a Class 0 1 Counter message is received IO Production Send UINT Increments each time a Class 0 1 Errors Counter message is not sent IO Consumption UINT Increments each time a Receive Errors Counter consumption is received with a detected error X supported not supported S1A34009 10 2014 247 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 04 Explicit Messaging STRUCT X X Diagnostics Class 3 Msg Send UDINT Increments each time a Class 3 Counter message is sent client and server Class 3 Msg Receive UDINT Increments each time a Class 3 Counter message is received client and server UCMM Msg Receive UDINT Increments each time a UCMM Counter message is sent client and server UCMM Msg Receive UDINT Increments each time a UCMM Counter message is received client and server X supported not supported Services The E
66. be caused by excessive network traffic or server overload NTP not configured invalid NTP parameter setting NTP component disabled unrecoverable NTP transmission invalid NTP server IP address e 15 invalid syntax in the custom time zone rules file ee ooo ONR ON Primary Secondary NTP Server IP The IP address of the primary and the secondary NTP server NOTE A green LED to the right of the primary or secondary NTP server IP address identifies the currently active server Auto Adjust Clock for Daylight Savings The configuration setting of the daylight savings adjustment service e enabled e disabled DST Start DST End Specifies the day that daylight savings time begins and ends Month The month daylight savings time starts or ends Day of Week The day of the week daylight savings time starts or ends Week The occurrence of the specified day within the specified month Time Zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time Coordinated UTC Offset The time in minutes to be combined with the selected Time Zone selection to produce the system time Polling Period The frequency the NTP client requests time updates from the NTP server 1A34009 10 2014 321 Diagnostics Communication Module RSTP Diagnostics Introduction Use the RSTP Diagnostic page to display either dynamically generated or static data for a BMX NOC 0401 M340 communication
67. cannot distinguish between explicit message and implicit messages However these devices including the Ethernet communication module can support QoS Ethernet packet tagging Using Qos tagging these devices can handle messages they send and receive according to each message s tagged priority forwarding higher priority messages before lower priority messages 214 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Messaging Performance Maximum Messaging Load The Ethernet communication module supports a the following maximum messaging loads Message Type Maximum Messaging Load Implicit EtherNet IP plus Modbus TCP 12000 packets per second with no simultaneous explicit messages Explicit EtherNet IP plus Modbus TCP 120 packets per second with a maximum of 6000 simultaneous implicit messages 1A34009 10 2014 215 Optimizing Performance Message Frequency Introduction The term message frequency refers to how often a device transmits a particular type of message Message frequency directly affects control network load and performance as well as the CPU capacity of every network device that processes these messages Depending on your application requirements real time I O data can be transmitted using implicit messaging as follows e on a cyclic basis at the request packet interval RPI rate or e upon the occurrence of a change of state event Cyclic Real Time I O Messaging Much of th
68. communication module or acommunication channel 3 Page tabs Select a page to display module or channel properties e for the communication module Overview e Fault e 1 0 Objects e fora communication channel e Configuration e Debug Fault 4 General parameters View communication channel parameters e Function displays the configured communication function and is read only e Task displays the task configured MAST and is read only 5 Mode parameters Displays parameters for the mode you select by opening a page 334 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Communication Channel Diagnostics in Unity Pro Overview Select a communication channel in the Channel area to access the e Configuration page where you can e edit the EtherNet IP Module name e edit input and output data size and location settings e launch the Unity Pro EtherNet IP configuration tool Refer to the description of the Configuration page see page 36 for more information e Debug page which displays the communication module s e MAC Address e IP Address settings e Fault page which displays active detected faults for the communication channel MAC Address To display the MAC Address of the communication module Step Action 1 In the Channel area select the communication channel The following pages are displayed e Configuration e Debug e Default 2 To display the communication module s MAC Addres
69. configurations Data Editor a re Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types la x f Filter T X Name f V EDT M DDT F IODDT ReqSize gt Configuring the Address Variable Name Type X Value Comment bd ActionType INT 16 01 __ Transmission followed by await reception amp DataToSend ARRAY 0 4 OF INT _ DataToSend 0 INT 16 024E HiByte 02 Path Size LowByte 4E Service Code Read Holding Reg _ DataToSend 1 INT 16 4420 _HiByte 44 Class LowByte 20 Class Segment _ DataToSend 2 INT 16 0124 HiByte 01 Instance LowByte 24 Instance Segment _ DataToSend 3 INT 16 0031 Location of first word to READ DataToSend 4 INT 16 0001 Number of words to READ 1 ManagParam ARRAY 0 3 OF INT ManagParam 0 INT System Response MSB Exchange LSB bit 1 activity bit 2 cancel ManagParam 1 INT System Response Operation Report Communication Report ManagParam 2 INT 2 User Configuration Function block timeout 2 200 ms Hi ManagParam 3 INT 10 Length of DataToSend parameter in bytes ReceivedData __ARRAY 0 49 OF INT INT 10 DataToSend size in Bytes The Address variable identifies the explicit message originating device in this example the Ethernet communication module and the target device Note that the Address variable does not include the Xwa
70. data producing module in the rack its status and output echo data is designated by the integer 6 in bits 8 13 of word 4 and in bits 0 5 of word 5 in the Input Data table its output data is designated by the integer 6 in bits 8 13 of word 1 in the Output Data table Notes Select a cell in either the Input Data or Output Data tables to display in the middle of the page a description of the cell data and its source module Convert the size of the Input Data table and the Output Data table from words to bytes i e divide by 2 then use that data as the values for the Input Size 19 and Output Size 6 parameters when configuring the remote device s connection properties 142 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring I O Items Overview The final task in this example is to add I O items to the configuration of the STB NIC 2212 and its 8 I O modules To accomplish this e use the Advantys configuration software to identify the relative position of each I O module s inputs and outputs e use the Unity Pro Device Editor to create input and output items defining each item s e name e data type I O Item Types and Sizes The goal is to create a collection of input items and output items that equal the input size and output size specified for the STB NIC 2212 In this example items need to be created for e 19 bytes of inputs e 6 bytes of outputs The Unity Pro Device Editor
71. details refer to the Communication Module Commands topic see page 44 1 This command also appears in the Unity Pro Edit menu 2 This command also appears in the Unity Pro View menu 1A34009 10 2014 43 Configuring Name Description Device menu 2 This command opens a sub menu that contains device specific commands as determined by the device vendor For details refer to the Communication Module Commands topic see page 44 Properties Opens the Ethernet communication module Properties window Print device If this optional function is supported by a DTM this function displays the device documentation including configuration settings in the PC s default Internet browser which can then be printed NOTE Device information can be printed e for only one device DTM at a time when that DTM is not open for editing in the Device Editor only when the DTM is disconnected from the physical device Zoom out2 This returns to the display of the entire DTM connectivity tree Expand all This displays DTMs below the selected DTM Collapse all This displays only the selected DTM 1 This command also appears in the Unity Pro Edit menu 2 This command also appears in the Unity Pro View menu Communication Module Commands When you select Device menu in the main contextual menu for the communication module a sub menu with the following commands is dis
72. display dynamically generated data for the BMX NOC 0401 communication module s bandwidth usage Processor Load Display The Processor Load page looks like this PROCESSOR LOAD Module Load Processor Utilization 38 Communication Load EtherNet IP Sent writes 31 Packets per second 33 per a Scanner EtherNet IP Received read Packets per second Modbus TCP Requests az Packets per second Modbus TCP Responses 16 Packets per second 1 0 Adapter EtherNet IP Sent writes 0 Packets per second EtherNet IP Received read 0 Packets per second Module Capacity 12000 Packets per second Module Utilization 0 8 Client EtherNet IP activity Messages per second Modbus TCP activity Messages per second Messaging Server EtherNet IP activity 0 Messages per second Modbus TCP activity 0 Messages per second Copyright 2000 2009 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved NOTE The background color for the Processor Utilization and Module Utilization values varies depending upon the percentage of utilization If utilization is e 90 to 100 background color is RED e 80 to 89 99 background color is YELLOW e 0 to 79 99 background color is GRAY To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select E
73. e a change has occurred in the status of an agent or e an unauthorized SNMP manager device has attempted to get data from or change data on an SNMP agent 1A34009 10 2014 407 Glossary 408 1A34009 10 2014 Index 0 9 140 NOC 780 00 device editor 54 DTM browser 42 A access control 84 add remote device 127 159 address 1 0 186 advanced mode DTM browser 47 Advantys STB island connecting to 139 167 assembly object 231 235 auto negotiation 200 B Bandwidth Diagnostics 314 C channel properties 59 CIP objects 227 configuring properties in device editor 54 connection diagnostics 325 1 0 329 overhead 212 protocol 212 type 212 connection manager object 233 connection timeout calculating 211 control bits 188 D data editor creating a data template 361 direct address 363 lite 365 modify data 364 saving a data template 361 variables 363 data editor standard 356 data template displaying a data template 362 DATA_EXCH 279 283 287 295 error codes 392 explicit messaging 271 derived data types 182 184 derived variables 185 device bandwidth 219 device discovery 48 device editor 52 DTM browser 54 device load 218 DHCP 75 DHCP client 78 diagnostics 309 bandwidth 314 373 connection 325 Email 317 383 Ethernet port 377 local slave 325 messaging 377 NTP 319 385 port statistics 380 processor load 373 properties 387 QoS 379 rac
74. e select the BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module for your project using Unity Pro version 7 0 or higher Email messages are transmitted by the execution of a SEND EMAIL see page 95 function block included in your application logic NOTE To successfully send an Email message using the s1 END EMATL block the Email service and PLC application must be synchronized i e the Email service must be activated whenever the PLC is in RUN mode You can configure the Email service only in the Email Configuration page of Unity Pro You can diagnose the operation of the Email service in the diagnostic pages of both the Unity Pro software see page 308 and the communication module web pages see page 366 92 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring Email Service Parameters Use the following page to configure up to three Email messages SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server IP Address 192 168 4 4 Password Authentication Authentication Enabled Login Password Email Header 1 From To Subject Email Header 2 From To Subject Email Header 3 From To Subject operator1 company com SMTP Server Port operator merle mainoffice com Pump 1 pumping mud Merle shut her down operator17 company com fred company com Transformer 7 over load operator21
75. gt Input trigger Cyclic Output O gt T gt Output size 6 gt Output mode Point to Point Output type Fixed gt Output priority Scheduled r Description 136 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 In the General page edit the following settings RPI The refresh period for this connection Accept the value of 30 ms This parameter can be set in the DTM for the communication module or the remote device Input size The number of bytes reserved for input data from 0 to 505 Type in 19 NOTE Unity Pro reserves input data in increments of 4 bytes 2 words In this example typing in the value of 19 bytes reserve 20 bytes of input memory Input mode The transmission type e Multicast e Point to Point Accept the default selection of Multicast Input type Ethernet packet type fixed or variable length to be transmitted Only Fixed length packets are supported Input priority The transmission priority The value depends upon the device DTM Values can include e Low e High e Scheduled NOTE For remote modules that support more than one priority value you can use this setting to specify the order in which the Ethernet communication module will handle packets For more information refer to the topic describing QoS Packet Prioritization For the purpose of this example accept the default selection of Scheduled Input trigger The transmission
76. in Unity Pro What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Creating and Updating Derived Data Types 182 Working with Derived Data Type Variables 184 Effect of Activating and De activating Devices on I O MW Memory Addresses 193 1A34009 10 2014 181 Working With Derived Data Types Creating and Updating Derived Data Types Creating or Updating Derived Data Types After you have completed your edits in the Device Editor the next step is to let Unity Pro create the necessary program objects in the form of derived data types DDTs and variables that will support your network design To do this follow these steps Step Action 1 In the Project Browser navigate to and select the communication module 2 Do one of the following click the right mouse button and select Open in the pop up menu or e inthe Edit menu select Open The Configuration page of the Ethernet communication module opens below EXECS A101 Ethernet 4 Port 10 100 RJ45 a Configuration Project Network name M_NOC0401 Inputs Outputs MW Index MW Index Max size Max size EIP connectivity network Update application 3 Click the Update application button NOTE e Every time you use the Device Editor to make changes to your Unity Pro project return to this screen and click the Update application button to save your edits e Unity Pro refre
77. in the Type of Traffic section are read only 1 Schneider Electric recommends that QoS values be set in the configuration and not by saving settings to flash memory Settings saved to flash memory will be lost if the module is replaced NOTE You can also edit QoS configuration settings by using explicit messages to set the attributes of the QoS CIP object see page 237 Type of Traffic Settings QoS tagging lets you prioritize Ethernet packet streams based on the type of traffic in that stream The communication module recognizes the traffic types described below When the Use value from field is set to Configuration you can edit the prioritization values in this page Each traffic type can have a prioritization value from 0 63 Traffic Type Default DSCP Value for IO Data Scheduled Priority Messages EtherNet IP 43 DSCP Value for Explicit Message Modbus TCP amp EtherNet IP 27 DSCP Value for IO Data Urgent Priority Messages EtherNet IP 55 DSCP Value for IO Data High Priority Messages Modbus TCP amp EtherNet IP 43 DSCP Value for IO Data Low Priority Messages EtherNet IP 31 DSCP Value for Network Time Protocol Messages 59 1 Visible only when Advanced Mode see page 47 is enabled To effectively implement QoS settings in your Ethernet network e use network switches that support QoS e consistently apply DSCP values to network devices and switches that support DSCP e
78. in the Web Page HTTP Access password NOTE The default password is USER 3 Click Ok The new data template is saved Displaying an Existing Data Template When you open a saved data template you can use it to e edit its contents by inserting either a variable or a direct address e monitor the value and status of data items e write data values to a read write variables The data template list located on the left side of the Data Editor displays the saved data templates Select a data template node from the list to display that template s data items in the spreadsheet on the right L E Ba cy lt i E 23 o Rate 500 IP address 192 168 1 4 Empty Symbol Address Datatype Value Format Status Table 1 MW1 INT DECIMAL a MW121 INT DECIMAL 362 S1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Inserting a Symbol Variable Into a Data Template You can add Unity Pro variables also called symbols into a data template After a variable is added you can view or modify its value To add a symbol to a data template follow these steps Step Description 1 In the data template spreadsheet double click on an empty row The Data Editor configuration area opens 2 In the configuration area click on the ellipsis button The Lookup Variable dialog opens xi Show only variables starting with I Hide structured variables ACT 6 BOOL ACT 9 BOOL Animate_time TIME Out1 BOOL Out2
79. in the current password that is required to write data using password the Data Editor New write Type in the new Data Editor password password Confirm write Type in the same password entered in the New write password password field above 7 Click the Change Write Password button 1A34009 10 2014 351 Embedded Web Pages Configuring Port Mirroring Enabling Port Mirroring in Unity Pro You can use the port mirroring service to duplicate the traffic entering and exiting any one of the four Ethernet ports the source port onto another one of the ports the destination port for the purpose of diagnosing the source port NOTE e Verify that the port mirroring service is enabled in Unity Pro see page 73 before configuring it in the web pages e You can designate only non RSTP enabled ports as the destination port e The port mirroring configuration settings are transient and are cleared when you reboot the Ethernet communication module Configuring Port Mirroring in the Web Pages To configure port mirroring follow these steps Step Description 1 In Unity Pro enable the port mirroring service see page 73 to globally enable port mirroring 2 Navigate to and open the web server see page 348 using the IP address of the communication module The Home page opens 3 From the Home page click on the Setup main menu item If required input the username and web page password see page 349 The Setu
80. instructions presented in this chapter include specific choices made for a sample project Your Unity Pro project may include different choices that are appropriate for your specific configuration What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 2 1 Ethernet Network Configuration Example 28 2 2 Creating a Project in Unity Pro 30 2 3 The Unity Pro FDT DTM Interface 39 2 4 Channel Properties 58 2 5 Ethernet Services 72 2 6 Security 100 2 7 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Module as an EtherNet IP Adapter 101 S1A34009 10 2014 27 Configuring Section 2 1 Ethernet Network Configuration Example The Ethernet Network Example The Ethernet Network This manual describes the creation of a complete Ethernet network configuration for the following topology Primary PLC incorporating the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module A secondary PLC that listens to the scan of the primary PLC local slave by the third party scanner Ethernet managed switch Advantys STB island with an STB NIC 2212 EtherNet IP network interface module plus 8 I O modules Advantys STB island with an STB NIP 2212 Modbus TCP network interface module plus 8 I O modules Third party PLC that scans a local slave in the primary PLC 1 PC equipped with both Unity Pro configuration software upgraded with the Ethernet Configuration
81. is a sample of the events log displayed in the Diagnostics window 2009 09 25 08 57 23 2009 09 25 08 56 45 2009 09 25 08 55 14 2009 09 25 08 52 56 2009 09 25 08 52 17 2009 09 25 08 50 44 2009 09 25 08 49 12 2009 09 25 08 48 52 2009 09 25 08 46 56 2009 09 25 08 45 17 2009 09 25 08 43 44 2009 09 25 08 42 12 2009 09 25 08 40 52 Logging Attributes Date Time LogLevel Message Detail Message lt Error Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Information Warning Information Information Information Communication error occurred Unknown status The FDT Frame Application has IP Address of slave device succe The FDT Frame Application has DTM is offline DTM is offline The FDT Frame Application has The FDT Frame Application has The FDT Frame Application has The persisted network interface c DTM is offline The FDT Frame Application has The FDT Frame Application has 192 168 1 1 gt 192 The Logging window displays the result of an operation or function performed by Unity Pro Each log entry includes the following attributes Attribute Description Date Time The time the event occurred displayed in the format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Log Level The level of event importance Values include Information A successfully completed operation Warning An operation that Unity Pro completed b
82. is selected x amp Host PC S R 152 105 14 gt Nocot B lt EtherNet IP 192 168 1 6 gt NIC2212_01 NOTE The selected module is connected to the STB NIC 2212 network interface device bearing the alias name NIC2212_01 which is the module you want to add to the DHCP service 2 With NOC01 selected in the DTM Browser click the right mouse button and select Open in the pop up menu orn a Add Delete Del Field bus discovery Connect Disconnect Load data from device Store data to device Device menu gt Properties ALT Enter Print device Zoom out Expand all Collapse all The Device Editor opens 78 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action 3 In the navigation tree on the left side of the Device Editor expand the Device List node and select the device for which you want to enable the DHCP service In this example select NIC2212_01 Channel Properties Services EtherNet IP Local Slaves Device List amp Read Input Write Output Data Items 5 Logging Unity Pro displays the properties for the selected remote device in the right pane of the window 4 In the right pane of the window select the Address Setting tab to display the following page Properties Address Setting r Change Address IP Address m Address Server DHCP for this device Enabled v Identified by Device Name x Identifier NI
83. load contributed by messages received and sent by a device within one second Device Load is the sum of the Message Load values for every message handled by the device If the Device Load exceeds the device s processing capability performance of both the device and the network is degraded NOTE Schneider Electric recommends that Device Load not exceed 90 of CPU processing capacity of each device 218 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Device Bandwidth measured in bits is the sum of the Message Bandwidth values for messages handled by the device In your control application design determine whether the I O scanner device can handle the load contributed by every I O adapter device To do this perform the following steps 1 Calculate the implicit messaging load and bandwidth for each remote device 2 Sum the load and bandwidth estimates for every remote device 3 Compare the total implicit messaging load and bandwidth against the maximum implicit messaging capacity of the device acting as I O scanner If the projected total load or bandwidth for a communication module acting as an I O scanner exceeds its implicit messaging load or bandwidth limits consider one or more of the following corrective actions e Ifthe I O adapter supports rack optimized connections and if a single rack of digital I O uses multiple direct connections replace the direct connections with a single rack optimized connection if possible
84. manage I O objects for the module Module Status Icons The Ethernet Module window displays three icons that reflect the current status of the following LEDs e Run e ERR e STS Refer to the description of LED indicators see page 306 for information on how to use these icons Accessing Module Detected Faults To display the detected active faults on the communication module Step Action 1 In the Channel area select the communication module The following pages are displayed e Overview e Fault 1 0 Objects 2 To display the communication module s active detected faults click on the Fault page Ethernet 1 Port 10 100 RJ45 eeu LEL BMX NOC 0401 Anero Run ERR STS C Fautt In VO Objects Internal fault External fault Other fault Faulty channel s P Overview Function Ethernet Task MAST 1A34009 10 2014 337 Diagnostics NOTE You can also access the module detected error bit by using the Unity Pro Animation Table to display the lr m MOD ERR object Managing I O Objects Use the I O Objects page to view module I O objects and to manage the association of these objects with variables Open the I O Objects page by selecting the I O Objects tab after the communication module has been selected in the Channel area Ethernet 1 Port 10 100 Ru4s coo Run ERR STS i 1 r kwil BMX NOC 101 L VO Objects
85. more efficient than using a rack optimized connection In this design because only the single device input data is sent the size of the frequently transmitted message is potentially much smaller than would be the case if the message contained data from every I O device on the remote island NOTE A change of state versus cyclic triggered real time I O message usually reduces network load Configure the change of state message with a longer connection timeout value RSTP and IGMP Messaging RSTP and IGMP messages usually consume a very small amount of network bandwidth Set up the IGMP query period based on your application requirements 216 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Scheduling Certain Explicit Messages Depending on your application requirements you can also configure certain explicit messages to be transmitted either cyclically or upon the occurrence of a change of state event For example you can periodically monitor a device using SNMP query Web pages EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP The cyclic period should be configured so that the total load consumed by explicit messaging does not exceed 10 of network capacity 1A34009 10 2014 217 Optimizing Performance Allocating Network Bandwidth Introduction Maximum network bandwidth equals your network speed for example 100 Mbps When designing your control network allocate network bandwidth among the control application messages required by your applica
86. not part of the communication module s Ethernet configuration to the communication module s IP addressing service Step Description 1 In the Address Server page click the Add Device Manually button Unity Pro adds an empty row to the list of Manually Added Devices 2 In the new row configure the following parameters for the client device IP Address Type in the IP address of the client device Identifier Type Select the type of value the client device will use to identify itself to the FDR server e MAC address e Device Name Identifier Depending upon the identifier type type in the client device setting for the MAC address or Name Mask Type in the client device subnet mask Gateway Type in the gateway address that remote devices can use to communicate with devices located on other networks Use 0 0 0 0 if remote devices will not communicate with devices located on other networks 3 Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to apply edited properties to networked devices Viewing the Auto Generated DHCP Client List The list of Automatically Added Devices includes a row for each remote device that is e part of the communication module s Ethernet configuration and e configured to subscribe to the communication module s DHCP addressing service NOTE You cannot add devices to this list in this page Instead use the configura
87. of 004 Active Configuration e Enabled adds this device to the Unity Pro project configuration e Disabled removes this device from the Unity Pro project configuration Accept the default setting of Enabled 2 In the IO Structure Name section of the page edit the following Input area Structure Name Read only Unity Pro automatically assigns a structure name based on the variable name in this case T_NIP2212_01_IN Variable Name Accept the auto generated variable name based on the alias name see page 159 NIP2212_01_IN Output area Structure Name Read only Unity Pro automatically assigns a structure name based on the variable name in this case T_NIP2212_01_OUT Variable Name Accept the auto generated variable name based on the alias name NIP2212_01_OUT Default Name button Restores the default variable and structure names For this example custom names are used 3 In the Items Management section of the page edit the following Import mode e Automatic O items are taken from the device DTM and updated if the items list in the device DTM changes Items cannot be edited in the Device Editor Manual I O items are manually added in the Device Editor The I O items list is not affected by changes to the device DTM In this example select Manual Reimport Items Imports the I O items list from the device DTM overwriting any manual I O item edits Enabled only when Import mo
88. on the same switch when identifying a root port the port on a non root switch that is closest to the root bridge in terms of path cost or e designated port the port at one end of a network segment through which traffic passes on its way to the root bridge RSTP Cost The method used to determine the RSTP cost of the path through the embedded switch Values include e Auto the RSTP protocol will automatically assign a value to the switch by operation of the RSTP algorithm e Manual you input the RSTP cost an integer from 1 to 200000000 in the Value field Edge Port read only Set to a fixed value of Auto The RSTP process automatically determines if the port is an RSTP edge port Point to Point read only Set to a fixed value of Auto The RSTP process automatically determines if the port is an RSTP point to point port 1A34009 10 2014 91 Configuring Configuring the Email Service Using the Email Service Use the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP service to configure up to three 3 Email messages The PLC uses the Email messages you configure to notify specified Email recipients about meaningful run time events for example a change in overrun NOTE The Email service is available only when you first pe the value of a variable or a threshold rform the following tasks e upgrade the firmware in the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module to version 2 01 or higher
89. online help and documentation DVD that come with Unity Pro What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Creating a Project in Unity Pro 31 Configuring the Size and Location of Inputs and Outputs 36 30 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Creating a Project in Unity Pro Introduction This topic shows you how to create a new Unity Pro project and add to the new project the following components e aCPU e a power supply e aBMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module NOTE The following example uses Unity Pro version 7 0 or higher Creating and Saving a New Unity Pro Project Use Unity Pro to create a new project The following steps describe the creation of a project for the sample network Step Action 1 Open Unity Pro 2 In the Unity Pro main menu select File New The New Project window opens displaying a list of Schneider Electric controller types In the New Project window expand the Modicon M340 node to select a CPU New Project R TE x Show all versions OK PLC Min OS Ver Description Cancel Modicon M340 1 BMX CRA 31200 01 00 Ethernet Remote IO head for M340 platform Help BMX CRA 31210 01 00 Ethernet Remote IO head for M340 platform BMX P34 1000 02 40 CPU 340 10 Modbus BMX P34 2000 02 40 CPU 340 20 Modbus BMX P34 2010 02 00 CPU 340 20 Modbus CANopen BMX P34 20102 02 40 CPU 340 20 Modbus CANopen2 BMX P34
90. page and the Add dialog is updated and reflects any device additions or deletions Adding an STB NIC 2212 Remote Device To add the STB NIC 2212 to your project follow these steps Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the Ethernet communication module node and then click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the pop up menu select Add The following dialog opens Advanced Generic EDS Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 _ A Generic Device Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 fi Generic Device for Explicit Messa Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 A Modbus Device Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 ei STBNIC2212 from EDS Device Schneider Electric 2 10 TCDEI 888N D1U from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 E TCDEI 888N DYU from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 A TCDEI 888P D1U from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 yi cose _ 1A34009 10 2014 127 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 3 In the Add dialog select the STBNIC2212 then click Add DTM The Properties window for the STB NIC 2212 network interface module opens 4 In the General page of the Properties window edit the default Alias name because retaining the original default name can result in duplicate module names In this example type in the name NIC2212_01 E Genera
91. provides great flexibility in creating input and output items You can create input and output items in groups of 1 or more single bits 8 bit bytes 16 bit words 32 bit dwords or 32 bit IEEE floating values The number of items you create depends upon the data type and size of each item In the sample project the following items were created e discrete bits for digital inputs and outputs e 8 bit bytes or 16 bit words for analog inputs and outputs Mapping Input and Output Items Use the Fieldbus Image page of the I O Image Overview window in the Advantys configuration software to identify the number and type of I O items you need to create as follows Step Action 1 In the Advantys configuration software select Island 1 O Image Overview The I O Image window opens to the Fieldbus Image page 2 Select the first cell word 1 cell 0 in the Input Data table to display in the middle of the page a description of the cell data and its source module Make a note of the word bit s module and item information for that cell Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each cell containing either an S or an integer NOTE The Fieldbus Image presents input and output data in the form of 16 bit words starting with word 1 You need to rearrange this data for the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool which presents the same data in the form of 8 bit bytes starting with byte 0 1A34009 10 2014 143 Adding Devices to
92. s Ethernet configuration displaying for each device e P addressing parameters and e whether the device s IP addressing parameters are provided by the communication module s embedded DHCP server e manually add remote devices that are not part of the communication module s Ethernet configuration to the communication module s DHCP client list NOTE Confirm that each device you manually add is equipped with DHCP client software and is configured to subscribe to the communication module s IP addressing service The Address Server page looks like this FDR Server Enabled x m Automatically Added Devices Device Number IP Address DHCP _ Identifier Type Identifier Sub Network Mask Gateway IP Addres 003 192 168 1 6 Enabled Device Name NIC2212_01 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 m Manually Added Devices IP Address Identifier Type Identifier Sub Network Mask Gateway IP Address Add Device Manually 192 169 0 23 Device Name NIC2212_24 255 255 255 0 192 169 0 0 Remove OK Cancel Apply 1A34009 10 2014 75 Configuring To display this page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the Address Server field to Enabled The Address Server node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the Address Server node in the navigation tree
93. select Edit Connect The Port Configuration page looks like this Module Information Port Configuration Ping Group Paramstar Physical Interface Instance aQ General i Startup Configuration z Refresh gt DNS Enable Ja Q TCP IP Parameters gt Device IP Address Get Values from Device gt New IP Address gt Gateway Address Set All Values to Device gt Sub Network Mask gt Primary DNS Server Address Set Part of Values gt Secondary DNS Server gt Domain Name General aA Host Name C TCP IP Parameters gt Name Physical Interface C Host Name meet Pica C Physical Interface ig Get ued Set Values to Device gt Set 802 3 Link Auto Negotiation Disable gt Set Forced Duplex Mode Half Duplex gt Set Forced Interface Speed Indeterminate Description 262 S1A34009 10 2014 Online Action Get Port Configuration Settings To get settings from a remote EtherNet IP device on the network Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module upstream of the remote EtherNet IP device 2 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt EtherNet IP Explicit Message The EtherNet IP Explicit Message window opens 3 In the EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging page complete the Address section Note Port configuration explicit messages are sent as unconnected messages 4 Return to the DTM Browser and again
94. select the communication module upstream of the remote EtherNet IP device 5 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt Online Action The Online Action window opens 6 In the left pane of the Online Action window select a remote EtherNet IP device In the right pane click on the Port Configuration tab to open that page If the remote device consists of more than one port select the port number in the Physical Interface Instance list 9 In the Port Configuration page click the Get Values from Device button The table displays the returned values of the communication properties for the selected remote device and port Edit and Set Port Configuration Settings To edit and set port configuration settings that were retrieved using the above described Get Port Configuration Settings process Step Action 1 Double click the left mouse button in the Value cell for the parameter you want to edit The cell becomes editable Note The page also displays a Description of the selected parameter 2 Type in or select the new value Repeat steps 1 2 for each parameter you want to edit 4 Do one of the following Click the Set All Values to Device to write every value to the remote device or if you edited parameters for only one part or group of the collection of remote device values then inthe Set Part of Values area select one property group
95. side integer 3 in this example identifies the module s physical position left to right among the modules in the rack The right side integer 1 in this example identifies the module s relative position left to right among only data producing receiving modules If the module is not a data producing receiving module e g a power supply or end of segment module no right side integer appears 1A34009 10 2014 141 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 12 Select Island 1 O Image Overview The I O Image window opens to the Fieldbus Image page VO Image Overview Fieldbus Image Modbus Image HMI lt gt PLC Word onn ata r2 Image Input Location Word 1 Bit 15 Family Networking Module STBNIC2212 V2 xx 1 41 7127 Item NIM status bit gt EtherNet IP Label NIM _Status_WD Output Data Each table cell contains one of the following alpha numeric indicators S indicates a status bit for the STB NIC 2212 network interface module e an integer identifies the relative position from left to right of a data producing receiving module with input or output data in that cell For example the STB DDI 3230 input module is the first data producing or receiving module in the rack its data is designated by the integer 1 in bits 0 3 of word 2 in the Input Data table e the STB DDO 3600 output module is the sixth
96. the CPU 1A34009 10 2014 293 Explicit Messaging Contents of the Received_Data Parameter The Received Data parameter contains the Modbus response The length of the response varies and is reported by Management _Param 3 after the response is received The format of the Modbus response is described below Offset words Length bytes Description 0 2 First word of the Modbus response e High byte MSB e if successful Modbus Function Code e if not Modbus function code 16 80 e Low byte LSB e if successful depends on the request e if not Modbus exception code see page 403 1 Length of the Remainder of the Modbus response depends on Received Data the specific Modbus request parameter 2 NOTE Structure the response in little endian order 294 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Register Request Overview The following example shows you how to use the DATA_EXCH function block to send an explicit messaging Modbus TCP request to a remote device in this case an STB NIP 2212 network interface module at IP address 192 168 1 7 to read a single word located in the remote device at register 5391 Implementing the DATA_EXCH Function Block To implement the DATA EXCH function block you need to create and assign variables for the following blocks ManagParam 3 DATA_EXCH ManagParam 0 0 0 and ManagParam 3
97. the IP address of up to two devices typically PC s running network management software to be the target of event driven trap messages These trap messages inform the management device of events such as cold start and detected authentication failures Use the SNMP page to configure the SNMP agent in the communication module The SNMP agent can connect to and communicate with up to 2 SNMP managers as part of an SNMP service The SNMP service includes e authentication checking by the Ethernet communication module of any SNMP manager that sends SNMP requests e management of event or trap reporting by the module The SNMP page looks like this Group Parameter B IP Address Managers gt IP Address Manager 1 0 0 0 0 gt IP Address Manager 2 0 0 0 0 lia Agent gt Location SysLocation gt Contact SysContact gt SNMP Manager False a Community Names gt Set Public gt Get Public gt Trap Public aA Security gt Enable Authentication Failure Trap False m Description OK Cancel Apply 1A34009 10 2014 81 Configuring To display this page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the SNMP field to Enabled then click OK or Apply The SNMP node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the SNMP node in the n
98. the default device values from its EDS file and displays them on screen Displaying Online Parameter Settings To view the current parameter settings for the remote device follow these steps Step Action 1 With a connection selected in the left pane click the Synchronize button The Synchronize Action message box opens 2 In the message box select Read values from the device then click OK The message box closes In the Online Parameters window the Status field displays the results of the read transaction e the parameter list displays current values 1A34009 10 2014 267 Online Action Editing Online Parameter Settings To edit parameter settings for the remote device follow these steps Step Action 1 With a connection selected in the left pane display either e default device settings or e current device settings In the Value column type in or select a new value for each setting you want to edit NOTE When you select a parameter the Description area displays an explanation of the parameter and its available settings Click the Synchronize button The Synchronize Action message box opens In the message box select Write data to the device then click OK The message box closes In the Online Parameters window the Status field displays the results of the write transaction 268 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 8 Explicit Messaging Overvi
99. then e click the Set Values to Device button Unity Pro sends the property value edits to the remote device via an EtherNet IP explicit message and displays the results in the Description area 1A34009 10 2014 263 Online Action Pinging a Network Device Overview Use the Unity Pro ping function to send an ICMP echo request to a target Ethernet device to determine e if the target device is present and if so e the elapsed time to receive an echo response from the target device The target device is identified by its IP address setting Unity Pro will verify that the target address is not a loopback address 127 000 000 000 to 127 255 255 255 multicast address 224 000 000 000 to 239 255 255 255 reserved address 240 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 broadcast address The ping function can be performed in the Ping page of the Online Action window Module Information Port Configuration Ping r Address IP Address 192 168 1 6 Ping Ping Ping Result J Repeat 100ms Stop on Error o Cear 264 S1A34009 10 2014 Online Action Pinging a Network Device To ping a network device Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module upstream of the remote EtherNet IP device you want to ping Click the right mouse button and select Device Menu gt Online Action in the pop up menu The Online Action window opens
100. these data types and variables to view the status of connections from the communication module to remote EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP devices where e the status of connections is displayed in the form of a HEALTH_BITS array consisting of 32 bytes e each connection is represented by a single bit in the array e a bit value of 1 indicates the connection is healthy e abit value of 0 indicates the connection is lost or the communication module can no longer communicate with the remote device toggle a connection ON 1 or OFF 0 by writing to a selected bit in a 32 byte CONTROL_BITS array NOTE Distinguish between toggling a bit in the CONTROL_BITS array on or off and enabling or disabling a remote device monitor the value of local slave and remote device input and output items you created in the Unity Pro Device Editor 184 1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Identifying Derived Variables in the Data Editor To view your Unity Pro application s derived data type variables Step Description 1 In the Project Browser navigate to and double click the left mouse button on Variables amp FB instances Derived Variables Project Browser aj xi Ta Structural View g Project E Configuration E a Derived Data Types Derived FB Types Zi aS Variables amp FB instances Elementary Variables p Panes u IO Derived Variables E3 Elementary FB Instances Derived FB Instances Communication
101. time a Errors Counter consumption is received with a detected error CIP Connection Timeout UINT Increments when a connection Errors times out CIP Connection Opening UINT Increments each time a Errors connection is unable to open CIP Connection State UINT State of the Connection Bit CIP Last Error General UINT General status of the last error Status detected on the connection CIP Last Error Extended UINT Extended status of the last error Status detected on the connection Input Communication Status UINT Communication status of the inputs see table below Output Communication UINT Communication status of the Status outputs see table below X supported not supported 252 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 02 Connection Diagnostics STRUCT X x Production Connection ID UDINT Connection ID for production Consumption Connection ID UDINT Connection ID for consumption Production RPI UDINT RPI for production Production API UDINT API for production Consumption RPI UDINT RPI for consumption Consumption API UDINT API for consumption Production Connection UDINT Connection parameters for Parameters production Consumption Connection UDINT Connection parameters for Parameters consumption Local IP UDINT Local UDP Port UINT Remote IP UDINT Remote UDP Port UINT Production Multicast IP UDINT Multi
102. to e Ping a remote EtherNet IP or Modbus TCP device e view and write to EtherNet IP properties in a remote EtherNet IP device e view and write to port configuration properties in a remote EtherNet IP device EtherNet IP Opens the EtherNet IP Explicit Message see page 300 window Explicit Message which you can use to send explicit messages to EtherNet IP remote devices Modbus TCP Opens the Modbus TCP Explicit Message see page 302 window Explicit Message which you can use to send explicit messages to Modbus TCP remote devices Advanced Mode Displays or hides expert level properties that help define Ethernet connections See the Enabling Advanced Mode topic see page 47 for instruction on how to use this feature Connecting and Disconnecting a Device or Module DTM A device or module DTM can be either connected to or disconnected from the physical device or module When a device and its DTM are You can use the Ethernet configuration tool to Connected Monitor and diagnose the real time operation of the device or module Disconnected Configure a communication module or remote device by editing its properties NOTE Distinguish between e connecting and disconnecting a DTM and the associated physical device using commands in the DTM Browser and e placing Unity Pro in online or offline operating mode using commands in the Unity Pro PLC menu You can connect a DTM
103. to that module Unity Pro places one of the following status icons over the module device or connection nodes in the left pane of the Diagnostic window to indicate its current status This Indicates the following state for a icon Communication module Connection to a remote device Run state The health bit for every EtherNet IP connection and Modbus TCP request to a remote device or to a sub device or module is set to active 1 9 One of the following The health bit for at least one EtherNet IP unknown connection or Modbus TCP request to a remote e started device or to a sub device or module is set to e stopped inactive 0 not connected 310 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Ethernet Port Diagnostics Introduction Use the Ethernet Diagnostic page to display either dynamically generated or static data for the communication module s Ethernet port s The page displays five columns of data as follows e one column for an module s Internal Port and e up to four columns for the enabled external Ethernet ports ports 1 2 3 and 4 Use the Refresh Every 500ms checkbox to display static or dynamic data as follows When the checkbox is This page Selected Displays data that is dynamically updated every 500 ms and Increments the number at the top of the table each time data is refreshed De selected Displays static data and Does not Increment th
104. trigger Values can include e Cyclic e Change of state or application For input I O data select Cyclic Output size The number of bytes reserved for output data from to 509 Type in 6 NOTE Unity Pro reserves output data in increments of 4 bytes 2 words In this example typing in the value of 6 bytes reserves 8 bytes of output memory Output mode Accept the default selection of Point to Point Output type Read only Only Fixed length packets are supported Output priority Accept the default selection of Scheduled 1A34009 10 2014 137 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 5 Click on the Identity Check tab to open the following page General Identity Check Parameter Value P Check Identity Disable pn Description 6 In the Identity Check page set rules for comparing the identity of the remote device as defined by its DTM or EDS file against the identity of the actual remote device located on the network Complete the following settings Check Identity Define the rule Unity Pro will use in comparing the configured versus the actual remote device Settings include e Must match exactly the DTM or EDS file exactly matches the remote device e Disable no checking occurs the identity portion of the connection is filled with zero values the default setting e Must be compatible if the remote device is not th
105. unicast packets received on the interface Discards Inbound packets received on the interface but discarded Errors Inbound packets that contain detected errors does not include In Discards Unknown Protocols Inbound packets with unknown protocol Output parameters 312 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Parameter Description Octets Octets received on the interface Unicast Packets Unicast packets received on the interface Non Unicast Packets Non unicast packets received on the interface Discards Inbound packets received on the interface but discarded Errors Outbound packets that contain detected errors does not include In Discards Unknown Protocols Outbound packets with unknown protocol Error counter paramete rs Alignment Errors Frames that are not an integral number of octets in length FCS Errors Frames received with a detected FCS checksum error Single Collisions Successfully transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision Multiple Collisions Successfully transmitted frames that experienced more than one collision SQE Test Errors Number of times the SQE test error is detected Deferred Transmissions Frames for which first transmission attempt is delayed because the medium is busy Late Collisions Number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bittimes into the t
106. upload application 57 upload 57 username 350 V variables derived 185 VLAN 204 W web pages data editor standard 356 diagnostics 367 home 348 messaging 377 monitoring 355 password 349 port mirroring 352 port statistics 380 processor load 373 properties 387 QoS 379 rack viewer 371 redundancy 382 scanner status 375 status summary 368 wiring 22 412 S1A34009 10 2014
107. verify that switches apply a consistent set of rules for sorting DSCP tags when transmitting and receiving Ethernet packets NOTE The QoS settings for Scheduled High and Low priority messages also apply to input and output priority messages for a remote device You can configure these settings for a remote device in the Device Editor by selecting a device connection node then opening the connection s General page 88 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Description Ethernet ports 3 and 4 located on the front of the BMX NOC 0401 communication module support the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP is an OSI layer 2 protocol defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 RSTP performs two necessary services e it creates a loop free logical network path for Ethernet devices that are part of a topology that includes redundant physical paths e it automatically restores network communication by activating redundant links in the event the network experiences a loss of service RSTP software operating simultaneously in every network switch obtains information from each switch which enables the software to create a hierarchical logical network topology RSTP is a flexible protocol that can be implemented on many physical topologies including ring mesh or a combination of ring and mesh Use the RSTP General and the RSTP Advanced pages to configure RSTP for the embedded Ethernet switch in
108. web pages any target device to which the Ethernet communication module may send a Modbus TCP explicit message NOTE You need not add to list the IP address of devices that will be the target of EtherNet IP explicit messages When access control is disabled in the Services page the Ethernet communication module will accept Modbus TCP and EtherNet IP requests from any device The following graphic depicts the Access Control page immediately after a new row has been added to the list of Authorized Addresses but before the new item has been configured m Authorized Addresses Add Remove IP Address 0 0 0 0 OK Cancel Apply 84 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring To display this page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the Access Control field to Enabled and click either OK or Apply The Access Control node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the Access Control node in the navigation tree NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Adding and Removing Devices in the Authorized Address List To add a device to the Authorized Addresses list Step Description 1 In the Access Control page click Add A new row appears in the Authorized Address
109. 0 2014 155 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Section 3 3 Adding a Modbus TCP Device to the Network Overview This section extends the sample Unity Pro application by describing how to e add an STB NIP 2212 Modbus TCP network interface module to your Unity Pro application e configure the STB NIP 2212 module e configure a Modbus TCP connection linking the BMX NOC 0401 communication module and the STB NIP 2212 network interface module NOTE The instructions in this chapter describe a single specific device configuration example Refer to the Unity Pro help files for additional information about alternative configuration choices What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Setting Up Your Network 157 Adding an STB NIP 2212 Remote Device 159 Configuring STB NIP 2212 Properties 161 Connecting to the Advantys STB Island 167 Configuring I O Items 171 156 S1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Setting Up Your Network Overview This sample network includes the following hardware and software e a controller rack with BMX CPS 2000 100 240 VAC power supply BMX P34 20302 controller BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module e a remote STB Advantys island with STB NIP 2212 Modbus TCP network interface module STB PDT 3100 power distribution module STB DDI 3230 2 pt digital input module STB DDO 3200 2 pt digit
110. 09 10 2014 Chapter 11 Embedded Web Pages Overview This chapter describes the embedded web pages for the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module The communication module includes a Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP server The server transmits web pages for the purpose of monitoring diagnosing and controlling remote access to the communication module The server provides easy access to the communication module from standard internet browsers including but not limited to Internet Explorer What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 11 1 Accessing the Embedded Web Server 346 11 2 Monitoring the Unity Pro Application 354 11 3 Diagnostics 366 1A34009 10 2014 345 Embedded Web Pages Section 11 1 Accessing the Embedded Web Server Introduction This section introduces the BMX NOC 0401 communication module s embedded web server and describes how to access and to control access to the web pages What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing the Embedded Web Pages 347 Accessing the Home Page 348 Using and Editing a Username and Passwords 349 Configuring Port Mirroring 352 346 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Introducing the Embedded Web Pages Introduction Use the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module s embedded web ser
111. 09 10 2014 371 Embedded Web Pages Rack Viewer Displaying the BMX NOC 0401 When you click on the BMX NOC 0401 in the rack display the following web page opens a RACK VIEWER Leds RUN ERR Parameters IP Address Name Services Port 502 1O Scanner Global data Emails Server FDR Rack Slot Diagnostics 0 1 Module State Ok Reference Present Version 192 168 1 4 BMX NOC 0401 1 0 Net mask MAC Address Status Generic faults Ethernet interface disabled Duplicate IP Address Configuration mismatch Ethernet link disconnected Obtaining IP address Self test fault Application faults False False False False False False False False ex 255 255 255 0 0 80 f4 1 fb be M340 Communication Ethernet BMX NOC 0401 Product Range Trade Type Product Type Reference Configured Gateway 0 0 0 0 Counter Refused port 502 connections 0 Received messages sec 25 Filter messages sec 10 Dropped messages sec 0 Max received messages sec 2893 Max Filter messages sec 10112 Max dropped messages sec 46132 Nb of Multicast sec 9 Nb of Broadcast sec 2893 Reset FactoryCast Copyright 1998 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved Click on the blue Back arrow to return to the rack display 372 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Processor Load Introduction Use the Processor Load web page to
112. 1 NOK Bit 8 RSTP 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 9 Bit 15 reserved MWr m ch 0 Exchange Status EXCH_STS Bit 0 reading of status words of the channel in STS_IN_PROG progress Bit 1 command write in progress CMD_IN_PROG MWr m ch 1 Exchange Report EXCH_RPT Bit 0 detected error while reading channel STS_ERR status Bit 1 detected error while writing a command CMD_ERR to the channel 340 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Step Action cont d MWr m ch 2 Standard channel status low byte Bits 0 3 reserved 0 Bit 4 internal fault detected Bit 5 not used 0 Bit 6 X Bus communication fault detected Bit 7 application fault detected conf fault detected High byte Bits 0 7 reserved 0 MWr m ch 3 Ethernet Port Global Status ETH_PORT_STATU s Bit 0 detected configuration error Bit 1 the Ethernet interface is disabled Bit 2 duplicate IP address detected Bit 3 configuration mismatch Bit 4 reserved Bit 5 the module is in the process of obtaining an IP address Bits 6 15 reserved MWr m ch 4 IP address IP_ADDR IP_ADDR e During normal operation the double word MDr m c 4 contains the IP address configured or served to the module e In No Configuration state the double word MDr m c 4 contains the default IP address of the module e I
113. 1 Open the DTM for the remote device in this example NIC2212_01 by selecting it in the Device Editor then do one of the following e inthe main menu select Edit Open or e click the right mouse button and select Open in the pop up menu The remote device DTM opens in the Device Editor 2 In the navigation pane on the left side of the Device Editor confirm that the remote device connection is of the type Read Input Write Output Data To view the connection type select NIC2212_01 in the left pane of the Device Editor If the connection type is not of the type Read Input Write Output Data delete the existing connection and add a new one as follows a With the connection selected in the left pane click the Remove Connection button The existing connection is removed b Click the Add Connection button The Select the connection to add dialog opens c Use the scroll buttons on the drop down list to display and select the Read Input Write Output Data connection type d Click OK to close the Select the connection to add dialog The new connection node appears e Click Apply to save the new connection leaving the Device Editor open for additional edits 3 With the Read Input Write Output Data node selected click on the General tab General Identity Check Group Parameter I Value gt RPI 30 la Input T gt O gt Input size 19 gt Input mode Multicast TE A Input type Fixed gt Input priority Scheduled
114. 10 10 x Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 9 Click Apply to save the new items and leave the page open 176 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 10 Repeat steps 2 6 for each new word item you need to create In this example that includes the following items e Rows 2 3 Default Items Name Root DDI3230_in_st Rows 10 11 Default Items Name Root Rows 12 13 Default Items Name Root Rows 14 15 Default Items Name Root Rows 16 17 Default Items Name Root Rows 18 19 Default Items Name Root Rows 20 21 Default Items Name Root Rows 22 23 Default Items Name Root Rows 24 25 Default Items Name Root Rows 26 27 Default Items Name Root Rows 28 29 Default Items Name Root Rows 30 31 Default Items Name Root Rows 32 33 Default Items Name Root Rows 34 35 Default Items Name Root Rows 4 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3200_out_echo Rows 6 7 Default Items Name Root DDO3200_out_st Rows 8 9 Default Items Name Root DDI3420_in_data DDI3420_in_st DDO3410_out_echo DDO3410_out_st DDI3610_in_data DDI3610_in_st DDO3600_out_echo DDO3600_out_st AVI1270_CH1_in_data AVI1270_CH1_in_st AVI1270_CH2_in_data AVI1270_CH2_in_st AVO1250_CH1_out_st AVO1250_CH2_out_st 11 The next task is to create output words 1A34009 10 2014 177 Adding Devices to an
115. 1A34009 10 2014 97 Configuring To display this page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the Network Time Service field to Enabled The Network Time Service node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the Network Time Service node in the navigation tree Viewing and Configuring Network Time Service Settings The following settings can be viewed and edited in this page Property Description NTP Server Configuration Primary NTP Server IP Address The IP address of the NTP server from which the Ethernet communication module first requests a time setting Secondary NTP Server IP Address The IP address of the back up NTP server from which the Ethernet communication module requests a time setting after not receiving a response from the primary NTP server Polling Period The frequency 1 120 seconds the Ethernet communication module uses for requesting a time setting from the NTP server Default 18 seconds Time Zone Time Zone Setting The time zone associated with the Ethernet communication module selected from a list that includes time zones around the globe Default Greenwich Mean Time GMT 0 minutes Timezone Offset The number of minutes 1439 1439 used to adjust the Time Zone Setting Default 0 minutes
116. 2 0 0 cece eee Device Editor rei pendi oe dy news eee od ence ee epee E Configuring Properties in the Device Editor Uploading and Downloading DTM Based Applications 2 4 Channel Properties 0 0 0 0 00 cece ee Channel Properties Page 0 cece Channel Properties Switch Settings 00005 Channel Properties QOS Queue 1 ee Channel Properties TCP IP Page 0 e eee eee Channel Properties EtherNet IP Page 0000 2 9 Ethemet Services ssa s2caen tor ee bee ee eee ee lee ee Enabling Ethernet Services cussas cacar 600 ee Configuring the DHCP and FDR Servers 00 55 Configuring the SNMP Agent 0 00 00 eee eee ee eee Configuring Access Control 0 00 0 c cece eee Configuring QoS Ethernet Packet Tagging 4 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 89 Configuring the Email Service 0 0 eee 92 Sending Email via the SEND_EMAIL Block 95 Configuring the Network Time Service 000e eee eee 97 267 SSCUMLY zi aao e tate i edits Soc od sa ie ht ceee fe Boe E aces dada te cyst a E SRe 100 Security Features 00 00s 100 2 7 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Module as an EtherNet IP Adaptere o ereire a a escheat EE E 101 Introducing the Local Slave 0000 00 102 Configuring a Local
117. 2020 02 40 CPU 340 20 Modbus Ethernet BMX P34 2030 02 00 CPU 340 20 Ethernet CANopen BMX P34 20302 02 40 CPU 340 20 Ethernet CANopen2 BMX PRA 0100 02 30 Peripheral Remote I O Adapter Premium Quantum In this example select the BMX P34 20302 Ethernet CANopen2 controller NOTE By selecting the BMX P34 20302 Ethernet CANopenz2 controller you can later select the BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module 1A34009 10 2014 31 Configuring Step Action 4 Click OK Unity Pro displays the Project Browser below Project Browser Ta Structural View B Project amp Configuration fja W 0 PLC bus Derived Data Types rey Derived FB Types To save the project select File Save The Save As dialog opens In the Save As dialog type in a File name which will be the name of your Unity Pro project then click Save Unity Pro saves your project to the specified path location NOTE You can change the default location Unity Pro uses to store project files Before saving your project 1 Select Tools Options The Options Management window opens 2 Inthe left pane navigate to Options General Paths 3 Inthe right pane type in a new path location for the Project path You can also edit the e Import Export file path XVM path Project settings templates path 4 Click OK close the window and save your path edits 32 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring
118. 23546 3122 xl S1A34009 10 2014 311 Diagnostics To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic node In the left pane of the Diagnostic window select the communication module 4 Click on the Ethernet Diagnostic tab to open that page Ethernet Diagnostic Parameters The Ethernet Diagnostic page displays the following parameters for each communication module port Parameter Description General parameters Interface Speed Valid values include 0 10 100 Mbits second Interface Flags Bit O Link Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 1 Duplex Mode see below Bits 2 4 Negotiation Status see below Bit 5 Manual Setting Requires Reset see below Bit 6 Local Hardware Fault detected see below Duplex Mode 0 half duplex 1 full duplex Negotiation Status 3 successfully negotiated speed and duplex 4 forced speed and link Manual Setting Requires Reset 0 automatic 1 device requires reset Local Hardware Fault 0 no event 1 event detected Physical Address Module MAC Address Input parameters Octets Octets received on the interface Unicast Packets Unicast packets received on the interface Non Unicast Packets Non
119. 278 message frequency 216 message load 278 message response time 220 message traverse time 220 410 1A34009 10 2014 Index messages types 209 messaging 377 monitoring web page 355 mounting 27 N network example 28 network bandwidth 279 network example 125 157 network load 279 network time service 97 NTP diagnostics 319 385 O online action CIP object 260 display CIP object data 267 get port configuration 263 ping 264 port configuration 262 reset 267 set port configuration 263 online parameters 266 outputs address 186 P password data editor write 350 web page access 350 web pages 349 physical description 14 ping 264 port diagnostics 377 port mirroring 206 web pages 352 port statistics 380 processor load 373 Q QoS 62 86 201 214 379 QoS object 237 R rack viewer 377 redundancy 382 remote device configuring 129 161 replacement 343 RSTP 89 203 RSTP Diagnostics 322 S scanner status 375 SEND_EMAIL 95 services enabling 73 SMTP codes 405 SNMP agent 81 207 specifications 17 communication 19 status summary 368 STB NIC 2212 configuring I O items 143 STB NIP 2212 configuring I O items 171 switch managed 199 recommended features 199 T TCP IP interface object 239 timeout connection 211 U uninstall 25 S1A34009 10 2014 411 Index Unity Pro create project 37 download application 56
120. 34009 10 2014 329 Diagnostics The following example depicts the I O Values page for a remote device connection EIP Connection Diagnostic I O Values JV Refresh every 500 ms m Input 00 00 00 00 00 00 Length 6 Status 68 m Output 00 00 00 00 00 00 Length 6 Status 68 Local Slave Connection I O Values This page displays the following parameters for either a local slave or a remote device connection input and output values Parameter Description Input Output A display of the local slave or remote device input or output data data display image Length The number of bytes in the input or output data image Status The Scanner Diagnostic object s scanner status see page 249 with respect to the read of the input or output data image 330 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Logging Description Unity Pro maintains a log of events for e the Unity Pro embedded FDT container e each Ethernet communication module DTM and e each EtherNet IP remote device DTM Events relating to the Unity Pro FDT container are displayed in the FDT log event page of the Output Window Events relating to a communication module or remote EtherNet IP device are displayed e in configuration mode in the Device Editor by selecting the Logging node in the left pane e in diagnostic mode in the Diagnostics window by selecting the Logging node in the left pane The following
121. 4 Attribute not supported The attribute specified in the request is not supported 15 Too much data The service supplied more data than was expected 16 Object does not exist The object specified does not exist in the device 17 Service fragmentation The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for sequence notin progress this data 18 No stored attribute data The attribute data of this object was not saved prior to the requested service 19 Store operation The attribute data of this object was not saved due to an unsuccessful unsuccessful attempt 1A Routing unsuccessful The service request package was too large for transmission on a request packet too large network in the path to the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service 1B Routing unsuccessful The service response packet was too large for transmission on a response packet too large network in the path from the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service 1C Missing attribute list entry The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was data needed by the service to perform the requested behavior 1D Invalid attribute value list The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for those attributes that were invalid 1E Embedded service error An embedded service resulted in a detected error 400 S1A34009 10 2014 CIP General Status Codes
122. 4 Connection established 58 Not connected TCP 65 Not connected CIP 68 Connection establishing 70 Not connected EPIC 77 Scanner stopped 328 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Local Slave or Connection I O Value Diagnostics Introduction Use the I O Values page to display both the input data image and output data image for the selected local slave or connection Use the Refresh Every 500ms checkbox to display static or dynamic data as follows When the checkbox is This page Selected e Displays data that is dynamically updated every 500 ms and e Increments the number at the top of the table each time data is refreshed De selected e Displays static data and e Does not Increment the number at the top of the table which instead displays a constant value NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the communication module or remote device DTM to the physical module or device To do this select the appropriate node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic In the left pane of the Diagnostic window click on one of the following e the communication module node or a connection node Click on the I O Values tab to open that page 1A
123. 401 Module 21 Installing Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Software 23 Uninstalling the Ethernet Configuration Tool 25 1A34009 10 2014 13 Installation Physical Description of the BMX NOC 0401 Module Front The front of the module presents the following features Module number LED display MAC address label a 10 100 base T RJ 45 cable connectors va TT 10 100 base T RJ 45 cable connectors RSTP ports 14 S1A34009 10 2014 Installation Rotary Switches The back of the BMX NOC 0401 presents two rotary switches which you can use to specify how the module will obtain its IP address The settings of these two rotary switches work together to specify the source of the module s IP address as follows Setting Description Upper switch 0 9 Tens value 0 10 20 90 for the device name setting It is added to the ones value on the lower switch to identify the module to a DHCP server A F Tens value 100 200 300 150 for the device name setting It is added to the ones value on the lower switch to identify the module to a DHCP server Lower switch 0 9 Ones value 0 1 2 9 for the device name setting It is added to the tens value on the upper switch to identify the module to a DHCP server A B BootP1 The module obtains its IP address from a BootP server C D Stored The module uses the IP address configured in the application
124. 7 Use the Open dialog to navigate to and select one or more EDS files or e a folder containing EDS files 8 After you have made your selections click Open The dialog closes and your selection appears in the Directory or File Name field 9 Click Next The wizard compares the selected EDS files against existing files in the library 10 Conditional If one or more selected EDS files is a duplicate a File Already Exists message opens Close the message 11 Page 3 of the wizard opens indicating the Status of each device you attempted to add agreen check mark x indicates the EDS file can be added a blue informational icon indicates a redundant file t a red exclamation point indicates an invalid EDS file Optional Select a file in the list then click View Selected File to open it 12 Click Next to add the non duplicate files Page 4 of the wizard opens indicating the action is complete 13 Click Finish to close the wizard 14 The next step is to update the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog see page 120 so that the newly added device is available for inclusion in a Unity Pro project 1A34009 10 2014 119 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Updating the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog Updating Hardware Catalog After you have followed the manufacturer s instructions and installed a module or device DTM on your PC the next step is to update the Unity Pro Ha
125. 76 Get_and_Clear X X supported not supported S1A34009 10 2014 245 CIP objects EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics Object Overview The EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 350 hex 848 decimal Instance IDs The EtherNetP IP Interface object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision x 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported 246 S1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 01 Protocols Supported UINT x 02 Connection Diagnostics STRUCT X Max CIP IO Connections UINT Number of Class 1 connections opened opened since the last reset Current CIP IO UINT Number of Class 1 connections Connections currently opened Max CIP Explicit UINT Number of Class 3 connections Connections opened opened since the last reset Current CIP Explicit UINT Number of Class 3 connections Connections currently opened CIP Connections UINT Increments each time a Forward Opening Errors Open is not successful Originator
126. 95 see page 396 Data managed by the user Management_Param 2 Block timeout Values include 0 infinite wait other values timeout x 100 ms for example e 1 100ms e 2 200ms Management _Param 3 Length of data sent or received Input before sending the request length of data in the Data_to_Send parameter in bytes e Output after response length of data in the Received Data parameter in bytes Activity Bit This bit indicates the execution status of the communication function It is set to 1 when launched and returns to 0 when its execution is complete It is the first bit of the first element of the table Example if the management table has been declared as follows Management Param 0 ARRAY 0 3 OF INT the activity bit is the bit with the notation Management Param 0 0 NOTE The notation previously used requires configuration of the project properties in such a way as to authorize the extraction of bits on integer types If this is not the case Management Param 0 0 cannot be accessed in this manner 1A34009 10 2014 273 Explicit Messaging Section 8 2 EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH Overview This section shows you how to configure the DATA EXCH function block for EtherNet IP explicit messages What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Explicit Messaging Se
127. A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics LED Color Description MS Module Status Green Red Off Power is not being supplied to the module Steady Green The module is operating normally Blinking Green The module has not been configured Steady Red The module has detected a major event Blinking Red The module has detected a recoverable event NS Network Status Green Red Off Power is not being supplied to the module or the module has not been assigned an IP address Steady Green The module has established at least one CIP connection Blinking Green The module has obtained an IP address but has not established any CIP connections Steady Red The module has detected that its IP address is a duplicate IP address Blinking Red One or more CIP connection with the module as target have timed out ETH STS Ethernet Status Amber Off No power is supplied to the module Steady Amber Indicates that the module is operating normally Four flashes The module has detected a duplicate IP address Five flashes The module is waiting for a served IP address Six flashes The module is using its default IP address Seven flashes The module has detected a configuration error NOTE If more than one diagnostic condition exists simultaneously the Ready LED displays the shortest flash sequence LNK Link Yellow Green Off An Ethernet link has not been established Yellow A 10 Mbit Etherne
128. BOOL Run_light1 BOOL Run_light2 BOOL OK Apply Cancel Select the variable symbol you want to add to your data template Click OK The variable name is displayed in the Symbol field of the row selected in the data template In the configuration area click Apply The selected row is updated Save your edits Inserting a Direct Address Into a Data Template You can add Unity Pro direct address items also called located registers into a data template After a direct address item is added you can view or modify its value To add a direct address item to a data template follow these steps Step Description 1 In the data template spreadsheet double click on an empty row The Data Editor configuration area opens 2 In the Address field of the configuration area type in the item s direct address In the configuration area click Apply The selected row is updated 4 Save your edits 1A34009 10 2014 363 Embedded Web Pages Modifying Data Values Using a Data Template You can use the Data Editor to write data values to a variable symbol or to a direct address item and send the new value to the controller For example suppose that you have programmed a pushbutton object to jog a motor when the button is depressed and to stop jogging when the button is released If communications are lost while the button is depressed the motor will continue to jog ev
129. C 0401 2 only after e selecting the BMX P34 20302 CPU for the project and upgrading the BMX NOC 0401 module firmware to version 2 0 or higher When you drop the communication module into the rack Unity Pro opens the communication module Properties window 11 In the General page of the module properties window type in an alias name for the communication module NOC01 Es General Device Information DTM Information Protocol Information DTM name management Alias name NOC01 Tag name Default I O vision management Default input I O vision Variable name NOC01_IN Default output I O vision Variable name NOC01_OUT Cancel Help When you change the alias name Unity Pro changes the base input and output type and variable names to match the edited alias name NOTE Schneider Electric recommends that you assign a unique alias name to each communication module This practice helps you distinguish between modules of the same type 12 In the File menu select Save to save your edits 34 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action 13 Click OK to close the Properties window The Local Bus now displays the three modules you have added MD PLC Bus zaxi Bus J 0 BMX P34 20302 02 40 x 14 The next step is to configure the located memory space in the CPU for the communication module s inputs and outputs see page 36 1A34009 10 2014 35 Configuring Co
130. C2212_01 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway OK Cancel Apply 1A34009 10 2014 79 Configuring Step Action 5 In the Address Server area of this page configure the following properties DHCP for this device Select Enabled Identified by The choices are e MAC Address or e Device Name Select Device Name Identifier Unity Pro has automatically added the device name NIC2212_01 For the purpose of this example accept this default value Subnet Mask Unity Pro has automatically applied the same subnet mask used for the Ethernet communication module For the purpose of this example accept the default value of 255 255 255 0 Gateway For the purpose of this example accept the default value of 0 0 0 0 6 Click OK to save your edits NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for more information on editing and saving property settings in this window 80 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring the SNMP Agent Description The Ethernet communication module includes an SNMP v1 agent An SNMP agent is a software component running on the communication module that allows access to the module s diagnostic and management information via the SNMP service SNMP browsers network management software and other tools typically use SNMP to access this data In addition the SNMP agent can be configured with
131. DO3200_out_st Byte 1 Bits 0 3 Default Items Name Root DDI3420_in_data Byte 1 Bits 4 7 Default Items Name Root DDI3420_in_st Byte 2 Bits 0 3 Default Items Name Root DDO3410_out_echo Byte 2 Bits 4 7 Default Items Name Root DDO3410_out_st Byte 3 Bits 0 5 Default Items Name Root DDI3610_in_data Byte 4 Bits 0 5 Default Items Name Root DDI3610_in_st Byte 5 Bits 0 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3600_out_echo Byte 6 Bits 0 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3600_out_st 12 The next task is to create input bytes and words 148 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Creating Input Items To create input items for the STB NIC 2212 example begin with an input data byte containing low byte status for the STB NIC 2212 module Step Action 1 Select the Input tab to return to that page Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name lal Default Item Name Root O feroca Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 id Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example both the Offset Device and Offset Connection columns represent the byte address The items you create will be either an 8 bit byte or a 16 bit word In the Default Item Name Root input box
132. Ds The TCP IP interface object presents 2 instance values e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes TCP IP interface object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision x 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 01 Status DWORD X 0x01 02 Configuration DWORD X 0x01 from BootP Capability 0x11 from flash 0x00 other 03 Configuration Control DWORD X X 0x01 out of box default 04 Physical Link Object STRUCT X Path Size UINT Path Padded EPATH X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 239 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 05 Interface STRUCT X X 0x00 out of box Configuration default IP Address UDINT Network Mask UDINT Gateway Address UDINT Name Server UDINT Name Server 2 UDINT Domain Name STRING 06 Host Name STRING X X supported not supported Services The TCP IP interface object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All x X Returns the value of all attributes 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Singl
133. E alos Ge x ehttp192 168 1 4 z gt Be File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ww BMX NOC 0401 Schneider KILEN AZ ty Electric Home Documentation Maintenance Languages English French German Italian Spanish Copyright 1998 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved PE TT TT _ neme fa 100 7 Use the Home page as the point of entry to the communication module s embedded web server From here you can navigate to every other web page 348 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Using and Editing a Username and Passwords Inputting the Username and Web Page Access Password A username and password are required to access web page content and edit application data All username and password settings are case sensitive The embedded web pages support the use of a single editable username for both web page access and data editing The factory default username setting is USER The embedded web pages require two different passwords as follows e an HTTP access password which grants read only access to web page content e a data editor write password which permits the editing of data values using the Data Editor Each password can be edited The factory default setting for each password is USER To input a username and password combination Step Description 1 After navigating to the embedded web server see page 348 select on
134. Ethernet Network Creating Output Word Items To create output items for the STB NIP 2212 example beginning with an output data word for the DDO 3200 output module Step Action 1 Click on the Output tab to open the following page Input Input bit Output Output bit l Default Item Name Root Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name F BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example each row represents a byte Because the items you create will be a 16 bit word each item consists of 2 rows In the Default Item Name Root input box type DDO3200_out_data Starting at the beginning of the table select the first 2 rows 0 and 1 Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root i DDO3200_out_data Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 178 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens x New Item s Data Type 7 Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s y
135. IDs The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 N instance N maximum concurrent number of diagnostic lists Attributes EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description Value GET SET hex 01 Revision 1 x 02 Max Instance 0 N x X supported not supported Instance ID 1 to N instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex 01 Originator connection ID UDINT X Originator to target connection ID 02 Originator IP UDINT X 03 Originator TCP Port UINT X 04 Target connection ID UDINT X Target to originator connection ID 05 Target IP UDINT X 06 Target TCP Port UINT x X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 255 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex 06 Msg Send Counter UDINT X Incremented each time a Class 3 CIPMessage is sent on the connection 07 Msg Receive counter UDINT X Increments each time a Class 3 CIP message is received on the connection X supported not supported Services The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics object performs the following services upon the listed obj
136. IP2212_01_OUT ji ji NOCO01_IN T_NOCO1_IN NOCO1_LS1_IN T_NOCO1_LS1_IN NOCO1_LS1_OUT T_NOCO1_LS1_OUT T_NOCO1 1A34009 10 2014 191 Working With Derived Data Types Step Action 3 Click OK to add the control bit array to the Connection_Health_Bits animation table E Connection_Health_Bits ARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE JARRAY 0 31 OF BYTE BYTE BYTE NOCO1_OUT CONTROL_BITS_OUT 2 BYTE UT CONTROL_BITS_OUT 3 BYTE NOCO1_OUT CONTROL_BITS_OUT 4 _ BYTE Keep in mind that each row represents a byte which contains eight individual connection control bits When the DTM for the Ethernet communication module is connected to the physical module the Value field displays a value for the entire byte With the DTM for the Ethernet communication module connected to the physical module double click in the Value column for the row byte that contains the control bit you want to toggle Type a value that toggles the bit or bits in the byte you want to change to on or off For example suppose the Value field of the control bit displays an initial value of 7 This indicates that the first three 0 1 and 2 are not established If you intend to establish the third connection connection 2 modify the corresponding bit to 0 type a value of 3 NOTE When the control bit is 0 the connection is established When the control bit is 1 the connection is closed
137. Indicate whether to display the ReadMe file Release Notes Display Click Next to continue 3 ReadMe Optional Displays the ReadMe file if selected above Click Next to continue 4 License Agreement Displays the software license Select accept then click Next to continue 5 Customer Information Enter the following data e your first and last names company name e identify for whom the software is installed anyone who uses this computer only for yourself Click Next to continue 6 Destination Folder Identify where the application will be installed Either e Accept the default path e Click Change and specify a new path Click Next to continue Ready to Install Click Next to continue Status Progress bar indicates the status of the installation When complete click Next to continue 9 Install Complete Click Finish 1A34009 10 2014 23 Installation The installation process described above copies the following objects to your PC e the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool e a Generic EtherNet IP DTM e a Generic Modbus TCP DTM NOTE A DTM is a small software driver that defines and enables a device Updating Hardware Catalog For installations of Unity Pro version 5 0 and higher the next step is to update the Hardware Catalog Updating the Hardware Catalog adds your new Ethernet communication module to the list of available modules and devices that you ca
138. Item Name 32 char max DDO3200_out_data_Qwo coms e NOTE The Define Item s button is enabled only when Input Mode is set to Manual 5 Select WORD as the New Item s Data Type then click OK A new item is created Input Input bit Output Output bit JF Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root 32 DDO3200_out_data_Qwo DDO3200_out_data Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply Click Apply to save the new item and leave the page open S1A34009 10 2014 179 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each new word item you need to create In this example that includes the following items e Rows 2 3 Default Items Name Root DDO3410_out_data e Rows 4 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3600_out_data e Rows 6 7 Default Items Name Root AVO1250_CH1_out_data e Rows 8 9 Default Items Name Root AVO1250_CH2_out_data Click OK to close the Items window Select File Save to save your edits The next task is to update the Unity Pro application 180 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 4 Working With Derived Data Types Overview This chapter describes how to complete your project by creating updating and viewing derived data type DDT variables
139. M NOTE e Because the STB NIC 2212 DTM does not contain pre configured input and output items select Manual To view I O items navigate to and select the Items node in the left pane of the Device Editor as follows Channel Properties Services EtherNet IP Local Slaves Device List 003 NIC2212_01 lt EIP 192 168 1 6 gt Read Input Write Output Data Items Logging Reimport Items Imports the I O items list from the device DTM overwriting any manual I O item edits Enabled only when Import mode is set to Manual Click Apply to save your edits and leave the window open for further edits 1A34009 10 2014 131 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring the Address Setting Page Use the Address Setting page to enable the DHCP client in the STB NIC 2212 network interface module When the DHCP client is enabled in the remote device it will obtain its IP address from the DHCP server in the Ethernet communication module The Address Setting page looks like this Properties Address Setting m Change Address IP Address Address Server DHCP for this device Enabled x Identified by Device Name z Identifier NIC2212_01 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 132 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network The following settings are used in this sample configuration Use settings that are ap
140. Offset Connection columns represent the byte address of an output while the Position in Byte column indicates the bit position within the byte of each discrete output item In the Default Items Name Root input box type DDO3200_out_data S1A34009 10 2014 151 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 3 In the Items List select the rows that correspond to bits 0 1 in byte O i e the first 2 rows Input bit Output Output bit efault Item Name Root 7 j DDO3200_out_data 0 2 0 3 0 4 Define Item s 0 5 0 6 Delete Item s 0 7 1 0 Show Properties 1 1 1 2 x Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several item s OK Cancel Apply 4 Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens Item Name Definition x Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s Item Name NOTE The asterisk indicates a series of discrete items with the same root name will be created 152 S1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 5 Accept the default output name and click OK 2 discrete output items are created Input bit Output Output bit 4 Offset Connection Position in Byte Item Name a Default tem Name Heo o 0 0 DDO3200_out_data_Qx0 I D003200_out aata 1 DDO3200_out_data_Qx1 A E Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properti
141. Originator IP UDINT Originator TCP port UINT Target connection ID UDINT T gt O connection ID Target IP UDINT Target TCP port UINT Msg Send counter UDINT Increments each time a Class 3 CIP message is sent on the connection Msg Receive counter UDINT Increments each time a Class 3 CIP message is received on the connection X supported not supported Services The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All x Returns the value of all attributes 08 08 Create X 09 09 Delete x 4B 75 Explicit_Connections_Di x agnostic_Read X supported not supported 258 S1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 7 Online Action Overview The Ethernet communication module supports online actions that let you e display CIP objects for the communication module or a remote EtherNet IP device e view and edit port configuration parameters for the communication module or a remote EtherNet IP device e ping the communication module or a remote EtherNet IP or Modbus TCP device to confirm it is active on the Ethernet network e connect to a remote device and then e view the remote device s default parameter settings e view the remote device s current parameter settings e edit and download to the r
142. P TCP TCP IP HTML web TCP TCP IP SMTP TCP TCP IP SNMP N A UDP IP SNTP N A UDP IP DHCP N A UDP IP BOOTP N A UDP IP Implicit EtherNet IP CIP TCP UDP IP Modbus TCP TCP TCP IP IGMP N A IP RSTP N A Ethernet Connection Overhead Any message transmission includes overhead which consumes network bandwidth and processing time The smaller the size of the data transmitted the relatively greater the portion of the message allocated to overhead Consequently it makes sense to design your I O messaging by consolidating data from multiple I O devices with similar processing capabilities and performance needs and transmitting it through a single adapter This design conserves bandwidth saves network resources and improves performance 212 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance TCP and CIP Connections Number of Connections Supported The Ethernet communication module employs both TCP and CIP connections to support both implicit and explicit messages as follows Connection Type Maximum Number of Connections per Module CIP 256 TCP 128 NOTE e A single TCP connection can support multiple CIP connections e The maximum number of TCP connections does not include connections dedicated to other services for example FTP and Web connections 1A34009 10 2014 213 Optimizing Performance Message Priority QoS The routers and switches that comprise your network infrastructure
143. Settings dialog 10 Select Online Connect The Data Transfer dialog opens below Data Transfer a The Configuration in the workspace does not match the configuration 1 in the connected island Please select one of the following options Download into the island disabled No configuration data available Download Cancel 168 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 11 Select Upload in the Data Transfer dialog The island workspace is populated with island data and shows the STB NIP 2212 and the island modules below PDT 3100 sgg Pro SHA a S lt m oan j a a apa 2m jo Ethernet N ta Q Q Q _ _ _ Note A box appears beneath each module containing one or two integers for example 34 These integers serve the following purpose e The left side integer 3 in this example identifies the module s physical position left to right among the modules in the rack The right side integer 1 in this example identifies the module s relative position left to right among only data producing receiving modules If the module is not a data producing receiving module e g a power supply or end of segment module no right side integer appears 1A34009 10 2014 169 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 12 Select Island 1 O Image Overview The I O Image window opens to
144. Switch Settings 61 Channel Properties QoS Queue 62 Channel Properties TCP IP Page 65 Channel Properties EtherNet IP Page 70 58 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Channel Properties Page Description Use the Channel Properties page to e select the IP address to use for e connecting module or device DTMs to physical devices and e sending explicit messages to Modbus TCP and EtherNet IP devices e view your PC s IP address settings The Channel Properties page looks like this r Source Address Source IP Address 192 168 1 99 z Sub Network Mask 255 255 255 0 r EtherNet IP Network Detection Begin detection range address 192 168 1 1 End detection range address 192 168 1 254 r Modbus Network Detection Begin detection range address 192 168 1 1 End detection range address 192 168 1 254 OK Cancel Apply To display this page select the Channel Properties node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties 1A34009 10 2014 59 Configuring Properties This page presents the fol lowing properties Name Description Source Address area Source IP Address A list of IP addresses assigned to network interface cards installed on your PC Sub Network Mask The subnet mask asso
145. T Array of BYTE X X 111 Local slave 2 T gt O input data Array of BYTE X 112 Local slave 2 O gt T Array of BYTE X X 121 Local slave 3 T gt O input data Array of BYTE X 122 Local slave 3 O gt T Array of BYTE X X X supported not supported S1A34009 10 2014 231 CIP objects Services The CIP Assembly object performs these services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x X Returns the value of the specified attribute 10 16 Set_Attribute_Single1 X Returns these values 0E attribute not settable assembly is not o gt T type OF permission denied assembly is being used by an active connection 13 config too small the Set_Attribute_Single command contains partial data 15 data too big the Set_Attribute_Single command contains too much data X supported not supported 1 When valid the size of the data written to the Assembly object using the Set_Attribute_Single service equals the size of the Assembly object as configured in the target module 232 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Connection Manager Object Overview The Connection Manager object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 06 Instance IDs The Connection Manager object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes Conn
146. TB island 4 with an STB NIC 2212 EtherNet IP network interface module plus 8 I O modules e AnAdvantys STB island 5 with an STB NIP 2212 Modbus TCP network interface module plus 8 I O modules e A third party scanner 6 which lacks adapter capability and therefore cannot itself be scanned by the primary PLC 1 that e collects data from other sources not part of this network e writes data to inputs of the primary PLC s local slave e scans the primary PLC s local slave s output data via an exclusive owner connection e APC running the following software e Unity Pro e the Unity Pro Configuration Tool e Advantys Configuration Software NOTE e Because the third party scanner 6 and the secondary scanner 2 are both receiving the same data produced by the local slave configure the requested packet interval RPI setting of the third party scanner s exclusive owner connection and the secondary scanner s listen only connection to the same setting e By enabling a local slave on the primary PLC 1 e PLC 1 allows the third party PLC 6 to write to it at a repetitive rate even if PLC 6 is not capable of acting as an adapter e the secondary PLC 2 is able to scan the primary PLC 1 at a repetitive rate rather than through application intensive explicit messaging The topics in this section show you how to use Unity Pro software installed in the PC 7 above to configure a local slave and to create input and outpu
147. TM based applications that were successfully downloaded to Unity Pro with the project s Upload information setting enabled can later be uploaded from the PLC to the PC if the target PC has the following files installed on it e aversion of Unity Pro that is equal to or higher than the version used to create the application e the master DTMs for the modules included in the configuration NOTE The Ethernet Configuration Tool installation CD contains the Master DTMs for the Ethernet communication modules referenced above e the device DTMs for the DTM based devices attached to the network confirm that the DTMs are of the same or higher revision as each device DTM used in the configuration e the device EDS files for any EtherNet IP device used in the configuration confirm that the EDS files are of the same or higher revision as each device EDS file used in the configuration After the above components have been installed on the target PC you can upload a DTM based Unity Pro application from a PLC NOTE Confirm that each of the above DTM components is installed on the target PC before attempting the upload 1A34009 10 2014 57 Configuring Section 2 4 Channel Properties Overview This section describes how to configure channel properties for the Ethernet network What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Channel Properties Page 59 Channel Properties
148. Target Specialized use in conjunction with gateways indicates that no Device Failed to response was obtained from the target device Usually means that Respond the device is not present on the network The preceding MODBUS exception response codes are derived from the MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1b as distributed by the Modbus Organization Inc at http www Modbus IDA com 404 1A34009 10 2014 Appendix D Email Detected Error Response Codes Electronic Mail Notification Service Detected Error Response Codes SMTP Codes The following codes are available only on the Unity Pro DTM and web page diagnostic screens for the electronic mail notification service Code hex Description 5100 Internal error detected 5101 SMTP component not operational 5102 Mail header not configured 5103 Invalid mail header value detected 1 2 or 3 5104 Cannot connect to SMTP server 5105 Error detected during transmitting content of email body to SMTP server 5106 Closing SMTP connection with the server returned a detected error message 5107 SMTP HELO request unsuccessful 5108 SMTP MAIL request unsuccessful SMTP server may require authentication 5109 SMTP RCPT request unsuccessful 510A No recipient accepted by the SMTP server 510B SMTP DATA request unsuccessful 510C Send email request contains an invalid length 510D Authentication unsuccessful 510E A r
149. The following screen displays a description of the Gateway IP Address property Configuration Static ad Group Parameter Value S 9 IP Address gt Scanner IP Address 192 168 1 4 gt Sub Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Description IP address of a machine likely to perform routing to another network internal or external OK Cancel Apply NOTE The page displayed above can be accessed by opening an Ethernet communication module in the Device Editor and then selecting Channel Properties TCP IP in the navigation tree 1A34009 10 2014 53 Configuring Configuring Properties in the Device Editor Configuring Properties The Device Editor can be opened from the DTM Browser To open the DTM Browser select Tools DTM Browser in the Unity Pro main menu To use the Device Editor Step Description 1 Confirm that the DTM you want to use is not connected to the actual communication module or device If necessary disconnect the DTM from the module or device see page 46 2 In the DTM Browser select the Ethernet network node you want to configure which can be either e an Ethernet communication module aremote device 3 With a node selected in the DTM Browser do one of the following Inthe Unity Pro main menu select Edit Open e Inthe DTM Browser click the right mouse button and in the p
150. Time System time NOTE Red text indicates the network time server is not available DST Status The actual working status of the automatic daylight savings service e ON automatic adjustment of daylight savings is enabled and the current date and time reflect the daylight savings time adjustment e OFF automatic adjustment of daylight savings is disabled or automatic adjustment of daylight savings is enabled but the current date and time may not reflect the daylight savings time adjustment Time Zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time Coordinated UTC NTP Server Status Connection status of the NTP server e check mark the NTP server is reachable no check mark the NTP server is not reachable IP Address The IP address of the NTP server Type The NTP server currently active e Primary e Secondary Network Time Service Statistics Number of Requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server Number of Responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server Number of Errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests Last Error Last detected error code received from the NTP client e 0 good NTP configuration 1 late NTP server response can be caused by excessive network traffic or server overload 2 NTP not configured 3 invalid NTP parameter setting 4 NTP component disabled 7 unrecoverable NTP transmission 9 invalid NTP server IP address 15 invalid
151. ToSend 0 NT 16 030E Request size in words Get_Attribute_Single DataToSend 1 NT 16 0420 Class and Class Segment DataToSend 2 NT 16 6424 Instance and Instance Segment DataToSend 3 NT 16 0330 Attribute and Attribute Segment 6 5 ManagParam ARRAY 0 3 OF INT ManagParam 0 NT MSB Exchange LSB bit 1 activity bit 2 cancel ManagParam 1 NT Operation Report Communication Report ManagParam 2 INT 2 _____ Function block timeout 2 200 ms ManagParam 3 NT 8 Length of DataToSend parameter in bytes 2 ReceivedData ARRAY O 49 OF INT 2 ReqSize NT 8 3 gt Configuring the Address Variable The Address variable identifies the explicit message originating device in this example the communication module and the target device Note that the Address variable does not include the Xway address elements Network Station because we are not bridging through another PLC station Use the ADDM function to convert the following character string to an address ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP where rack 0 module slot number 1 channel 0 remote device IP address 192 168 1 6 message type unconnected protocol CIP Configuring the ActionType Variable The ActionType variable identifies the function type for the DATA EXCH function block Variable Description Value hex ActionType Transmission followed by wait for response 16 01 280 1A34009 10 2014
152. ToSend 2 INT 16 0124 HiByte 01 Instance LowByte 24 Instance Segment a DataToSend 3 T INT 16 0000 Location of first word to write at target value MW1 _ DataToSend 4 INT 16 0001 Number of words to WRITE 1 E DataToSend 5 INT __16 006F _Data to WRITE the decimal value 111 z ManagParam ARRAY O0 3 OF INT Se ST gt ia ManagParam 0 INT System Response MSB Exchange LSB bit 1 activity bit 2 cancel 7 ManagParam 1 INT E System Response Operation Report Communication Report _ ManagParam 2 INT 2 User Configuration Function block timeout 2 200 ms _ ManagParam 3 INT 0 Program Action RegSize Value MOVE to ManagParam 3 D ReceivedData_ ARRAY 0 49 OF INT ReqSize INT 12 DataToSend size in Bytes gt Configuring the Address Variable The Address variable identifies the explicit message originating device in this example the communication module and the target device Note that the Address variable does not include the Xway address elements Network Station because we are not bridging through another PLC station Use the ADDM function to convert the following character string to an address ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP where rack 0 module slot number 1 channel 0 remote device IP address 192 168 1 6 message type unconnected protocol CIP Configuring the ActionType Variable The ActionType variable identifies the fu
153. Tool that ships with the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module and Advantys configuration software used to configure communication settings for Ethernet communication module in the primary PLC 1 and the remote network interface modules on the STB I O islands 4 and 5 Noo Rh OND 28 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Multiple Roles of the PLC and Ethernet Communication Module The PLC and in particular the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module can be configured to simultaneously perform multiple roles with respect to other network devices In this sample network you will learn how to configure the communication module to operate as e a scanner of devices that use the EtherNet IP 4 and the Modbus TCP 5 protocols e an adapter also known as a local slave that produces output data that both the remote third party PLC 6 and secondary PLC 2 can read as input data e a DHCP server that provides IP address settings to other devices on the Ethernet network e anFDR server that provides operational settings to devices on the Ethernet network that also receive their IP address from the DHCP server above 1A34009 10 2014 29 Configuring Section 2 2 Creating a Project in Unity Pro Overview This section shows you how to add modules including the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module to your project using Unity Pro NOTE For detailed information about how to use Unity Pro refer to the
154. Unity Pro automatically assigns a structure name based on the variable name in this case T_NIC2212_01_IN Variable Name Accept the auto generated input variable name based on the alias name see page 127 NIC2212_01_IN Output area Structure Name Read only Unity Pro automatically assigns a structure name based on the variable name in this case T_NIC2212_01_OUT Variable Name Accept the auto generated output variable name based on the alias name NIC2212_01_OUT Default Name button Restores the default variable and structure names For this example custom names are used instead of the default names 130 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action In the Items Management section of the page edit the following Import mode e Automatic Select this if I O items are pre defined for the device in its DTM and will not subsequently be edited These items are automatically created and added to the configuration and later updated if the items list if the device DTM changes These auto created items cannot be edited in the Device Editor Manual Select this if I O items will be manually created or edited If the device DTM pre defines I O items those pre defined I O items are automatically created and added to the configuration and can later be manually edited in the Device Editor The I O items list is not affected by changes to the device DT
155. Unity Pro includes a collection of modules and devices called the Hardware Catalog that you can add to a Unity Pro project EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP devices are located in the hardware catalog s DTM Catalog page Each device in the catalog is represented by a DTM that defines the parameters of the module or device Not every device on the market today offer device specific DTMs Some devices are instead defined by a device specific EDS file Unity Pro displays each EDS file in the form of a DTM In this way you can use Unity Pro to configure these Ethernet IP devices defined by an EDS file in the same way you would configure a DTM defined device Other devices lack both a DTM and an EDS file You can configure these devices by using a Generic DTM that is included in the DTM Catalog page This section address the topics e how to add a DTM to the catalog how to add an EDS file to the catalog how to update the catalog how to remove an EDS file from the catalog What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Adding a DTM to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog AT Add an EDS File to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 118 Updating the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 120 Remove an EDS File from the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog 122 116 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Adding a DTM to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog A Manufacturer Defined Process Before
156. a Starting at the next available whole word select 2 rows 2 and 3 Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection 0 Item Name Default Item Name Root AVO1250_CH1_out_data Define Item s Delete Item s 1 aS a 4 5 Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 154 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens x New Item s Data Type 7 Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s Y Item Name 32 char max AVO1250_CH1_out_data_Qw2 coms noe 5 Accept the default output name and click OK the following output word item is created Input bit Output Output vit J _Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name m Detauttiltem Name Root AVO1250_CH1_out_data 2 AVO1250_CH1 out data QW2 Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 6 Click Apply to save the new item and leave the page open 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for the AVO 1250 channel 2 output data at bytes 4 and 5 8 Click OK to close the Items window 9 Select File Save to save your edits 1A34009 1
157. a Modbus TCP connection e EIP indicates an EtherNet IP connection To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet Scanner Status If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 376 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Messaging Introduction The Messaging page provides current information on the open TCP connections on port 502 Messaging Display The top of the page displays the number of messages sent and received by local port 502 The Messaging page looks like this MESSAGING DIAGNOSTIC Diagnostics Number of Messages sent 94275 Number of Messages received 95274 Conn Remote address Remote port Local port Type Mess Sent Mess Received Error Sent 1 192 168 1 222 2568 502 Modbus TCP 3955 3954 0 2 192 168 1 6 1217 502 EtherNet IP 2345 2344 0 3 192 168 1 7 1222 502 Modbus TCP 1357 1356 0 Copyright 1998 2007 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved The display grid provides the following information about each active connection e Conn the connection number 1 to 64 e Remote address the IP address of the remote device NOTE If the remote device includes an embedded web server click on the Remote address to open that server and view the remote device s web pages Rem
158. a from the third party device has been received by the PLC is accessible in the third party device as input data In this example the third party device is programmed to scan Local Slave 1 for this confirmation When configuring inputs and outputs in both the local slave and the third party PLC associate inputs and outputs as follows Associate these local slave items With these third party PLC items Outputs T to O assembly instance 101 Inputs assembly instance 101 Inputs O to T assembly instance 102 Outputs assembly instance 102 104 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring The configured Local Slave page looks like this m Properties Number Comment Connection Bit 000 ad 0 Active Configuration Enabled x P r Assembly Inputs O to T Configuration Outputs T to O 101 102 103 Outputs T to O Size 2 1 509 Bytes Inputs O to T Size 8 1 505 Bytes Configuration Size 0 0 200 Words lO Structure Name r Input Default Name Variable Name Structure Name T_NOCO1_LS1_IN NOC01_LS1_IN Output Variable Name Structure Name T_NOCO1_LS1_OUT NOC01_LS1_OUT OK Cancel Apply Enabling and Naming the Local Slave Use the Properties section of the Local Slave page to enable or disable and identify the local slave Setting Description Number The un
159. a you can add a DTM to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog install it on the host PC the same PC that is running Unity Pro by means of an installation process defined by the device manufacturer Consult your device documentation provided by the device manufacturer for information describing how to install a device DTM on your PC For instructions on how to install the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module refer to the topic Installing Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Software see page 23 NOTE After you successfully install a device DTM on your PC update the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog see page 120 so the new DTM is visible in the catalog and available to be added to a Unity Pro project 1A34009 10 2014 117 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Add an EDS File to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog Overview Unity Pro includes a wizard you can use to add one or more EDS files to the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog The wizard presents a series of instruction screens that e simplify the process of adding EDS files to the catalog and e provide a redundancy check in case you attempt to add duplicate EDS files to the catalog NOTE The Unity Pro Hardware Catalog displays a partial collection of DTMs and EDS files registered with the ODVA This library includes DTMs and EDS files for products not manufactured or sold by Schneider Electric The non Schneider Electric EDS files are identified by vendor in the catalog Please co
160. ach byte or word input item you need to create NOTE The number of rows you select for a new item depends upon the item type If the item is a byte select a single row e word select two rows beginning at the next available whole word In this example you will create items for each of the following e Byte 9 Default Items Name Root NIC2212_01_HI_st Word 10 Default Items Name Root AVI1270_CH1_in_data Byte 12 Default Items Name Root AVI1270_CH1_in_st Word 14 15 Default Items Name Root AVI1270_CH2_in_data Byte 16 Default Items Name Root AVI1270_CH2_in_st Byte 17 Default Items Name Root AVO1250_CH1_out_st Byte 18 Default Items Name Root AVO1250_CH2_out_st The next task is to create output bits Creating Output Bit Items To create output bit items for the STB NIC 2212 example beginning with 2 output bits for the STB DDO3200 module Step Action 1 Select the Output bit tab to open the following page Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Position in Byte Item Name i r Default Item Name Root 0 o o BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties 0 O 0 iO iO iO O iO 0 o o olol olojo olo olo oloo NA ONOORWNA f Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several item s OK Cancel Apply NOTE Both the Offset Device and
161. al output module STB DDI 3420 4 pt digital input module STB DDO 3410 4 pt digital output module STB DDI 3610 6 pt digital input module STB DDO 3600 6 pt digital output module STB AVI 1270 2 pt analog input module STB AVO 1250 2 pt analog output module e a PC running both Unity Pro version 5 0 or higher and Advantys configuration software version 5 0 or higher e an Ethernet managed switch that is connected to the both the controller and island by means of twisted pair Ethernet cable and RJ45 connectors S1A34009 10 2014 157 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Network Topology The Ethernet network devices used in this configuration include the following BMX P34 20302 PC with Unity Pro and Advantys controller 192 168 001 099 BMX NOC 0401 2 192 168 001 004 BMX CPS 2000 power supply STB NIP 2212 192 168 001 007 STB DDO 3600 STB PDT 3100 TB AVI 1270 ower suppl ITE P PPY i STB AVO 1250 STB DDO 3200 STB DDO 3410 STB DDI 3230 STB DDI 3420 To re create this example e use the IP addresses for your own configuration s e PC e BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module e STB NIP 2212 network interface module e check wiring NOTE Unity Pro software running in the PC is used to configure the BMX P34 20302 controller In this example the PC is indirectly wired to the CPU s Ethernet port via the Ethernet switch Alternatively you c
162. area e Inthe MW index field type in a starting address for inputs in this example 0 Inthe Max size field type in the maximum number of 16 bit words dedicated to inputs in this example 16 In the Outputs area e Inthe MW index field type in a starting address for outputs in this example 16 Inthe Max size field type in the maximum number of 16 bit words dedicated to outputs in this example 16 Notes e Locate the inputs and outputs at the beginning of a 4 byte or 2 word range Because address numbering in the M340 platform is zero based verify that MW index input and output settings are configured to start at an even number e Allocate separate non overlapping space to inputs and outputs e Unity Pro automatically reserves space for two arrays of 32 bytes as follows e for connection health bits see page 187 located at the beginning of the space configured for inputs e for connection control bits see page 191 located at the beginning of the space configured for outputs e Confirm that the MW space assigned for both inputs and outputs is available in the CPU For more information refer to the Unity Pro help file topic Processor Configuration Screen 1A34009 10 2014 37 Configuring Step Action 3 In Unity Pro select Edit Validate or click the Validate button to save the address and size settings for inputs and outputs NOTE After you validate module settings fo
163. at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet Switch Port Statistics 3 If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 380 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Port Statistics Descriptions The Port Statistics page displays the following parameters for each communication module port Parameter Description Ethernet Configuration data Hostname The name assigned to the communication module MAC Address The factory assigned Media Access Control MAC address consisting of 6 hexidecimal octet values IP Address The Internet Protocol IP address see page 65 that has been assigned to the communication module Subnet Mask The subnet mask see page 65 that has been assigned to the communication module Gateway The IP address of the remote device see page 65 if any that serves as a gateway to the communication module Port Statistics Interface Label Un Initialized or Initialized Speed Operational Baud rate 0 10 100 Mbps Duplex Operational Twisted Pair Full Link Twisted Pair Half Link Frames transmit OK The number of frames that have been successfully transmitted Frames received OK The number of frames that have been successfully received Collisions The number of times a collis
164. ated above a way to avoid this shift of I O memory addresses is to activate every local slave and remote device that your project may require and then allow them to remain active To later disable a device use the appropriate control bits to toggle off every connection to that device 1A34009 10 2014 195 Working With Derived Data Types 196 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 5 Optimizing Performance Overview This chapter describes how to optimize the performance of your Ethernet network What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 5 1 Selecting a Switch 198 5 2 Control Application Design 208 5 3 Projecting Ethernet Network Performance 222 S1A34009 10 2014 197 Optimizing Performance Section 5 1 Selecting a Switch Overview This section describes how to select an Ethernet switch for your network What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Role of a Switch in an Ethernet Network 199 Transmission Speed Duplex and Auto Negotiation 200 Quality of Service QoS 201 IGMP Snooping 202 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 203 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 204 Port Mirroring 206 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Agent 207 198 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Role of a Switch in an Ethernet Network Overview Schneide
165. atus of Ethernet communication module messages What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page EtherNet IP Implicit or Explicit Messaging Detected Error Codes 392 Explicit Messaging Communication and Operation Reports 395 1A34009 10 2014 391 Detected Error Codes EtherNet IP Implicit or Explicit Messaging Detected Error Codes Introduction Ifa DATA_EXCH function block does not execute an EtherNet IP explicit message Unity Pro returns a hexadecimal detected error code The code can describe an EtherNet IP detected error EtherNet IP Detected Error Codes EtherNet IP hexadecimal detected error codes include Detected Description Error Code 16 800D Timeout on the explicit message request 16 8012 Bad device 16 8015 Either e Nor resources to handle the message or Internal detected error no buffer available no link available impossible to send to the TCP task 16 8018 Either e Another explicit message for this device is in progress or e TCP connection or encapsulation session in progress 16 8030 Timeout on the Forward_Open request Note The following 16 81xx detected errors are Forward_Open response detected errors that originate at the remote target and are received via the CIP connection 16 8100 Connection in use or duplicate Forward_Open 16 8103 Transport class and trigger combinati
166. avigation tree NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Viewing and Configuring SNMP Properties NOTE The sysName SNMP parameter is neither editable nor visible in the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool software By default the sysName is set to the Ethernet communication module part number NOTE When DHCP is enabled and Device Name is selected as the DHCP identifier for the module the SNMP sysName parameter is not set to the module part number but is instead the device name The following properties can be viewed and edited in the SNMP page Property Description IP Address Managers IP Address Manager 1 The IP address of the first SNMP manager to which the SNMP agent sends notices of traps IP Address Manager 2 The IP address of the second SNMP manager to which the SNMP agent sends notices of traps Agent Location The device location 32 characters maximum Contact Information describing the person to contact for device maintenance 32 characters maximum SNMP Manager Select either e TRUE the Location and Contact information are editable in this page e FALSE Location and Contact settings are not editable in this page Community Names Get Password required by the SNMP agent before executing read commands from an SNMP manager Default public 82
167. aying available project types Select STB Select File New Workspace The New Workspace window opens below 4 For this example type in the following field values e for the field Workspace File type in Advantys e for the field Island File type in Advantys_02 New Workspace Workspace File Island File Name Name Advantys Advantys_02 Location Name with path C Program Files Schneid _ ian Files Schneider Name with path C Program Files Schneider lt gt Cancel 5 Click OK The Advantys configuration software displays an empty DIN rail in the center of the screen 1A34009 10 2014 167 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 6 Select Online Connection Settings The Connection Settings window opens below 7 Inthe Connection Settings window accept the Modbus Node ID default setting of 1 select TCP IP and click the Settings button W Connection Settings Connection Type Modbus Node ID C Serial W 1 247 TCP IP Settings Cancel The TCP IP Parameters dialog opens below 8 Inthe Remote IP Address field type in the IP address for the STB NIP 2212 in this example 192 168 1 7 o TCP IP Parameters Parameters Remote Name Remote IP Address 192 1168 f1 i 7 Derive IP from MAC IP lt gt Name ILo Cancel 9 Click OK to close the TCP IP Parameters dialog and click OK again to close the Connection
168. button to update the data displayed Reset a Communication Module or Remote EtherNet IP Device To reset a communication module or remote EtherNet IP device Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select a communication module 2 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt Online Action The Online Action window opens In the left pane of the Online Action window select a communication module or EtherNet IP device In the right pane click on the Module Information tab to open that page Click the Reset Device button 1A34009 10 2014 261 Online Action Editing Port Configuration Properties for Remote EtherNet IP Devices Overview Use the Port Configuration page of the Online Action window to view and edit communication port properties for a remote EtherNet IP device Specifically you can use this page to execute a e Get command to retrieve port configuration settings from a remote EtherNet IP device e Set command that writes all or selected edited values to the same remote EtherNet IP device Configuration edits transmitted from this page are sent as EtherNet IP explicit messages and employ the Address and Messaging settings configured in the EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging window NOTE Before you can perform online actions for a remote device connect its DTM to the physical device To do this select the device node in the DTM Browser then
169. c to the protocol either EtherNet IP or Modbus TCP For EtherNet IP explicit messaging refer to the to the topic Configuring the Data_To_Send Parameter see page 277 For Modbus TCP explicit messaging refer to Unity Pro online help 1A34009 10 2014 271 Explicit Messaging Input Output Parameters Parameter Data type Description Management Param Array 0 3 of INT The management parameter see page 273 consisting of 4 words Output Parameters Parameter Data type Description Received Data Array n m of INT The EtherNet IP CIP response see page 278 or the Modbus TCP response see page 294 The structure and content depends upon the specific protocol 272 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring the DATA_EXCH Management Parameter Introduction The structure and content of the management parameter of the DATA_EXCH block is common to both EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP explicit messaging Configuring the Management Parameter The management parameter consists of 4 contiguous words described below Data source Register Description High Byte MSB Low Byte LSB Data managed by the system Management _Param 0 Exchange number Two read only bits e Bit 0 Activity bit see below e Bit 1 Cancel bit Management _Param 1 Operation report Communication report see page 3
170. cast IP used for production or 0 Consumption Multicast IP UDINT Multicast IP used for consumption or 0 Protocols Supported UDINT Protocol supported on the connection 1 EtherNet IP X supported not supported The following values describe the structure of the instance attributes CIP Connection State Input Communication Status and Output Communication Status Bit Number Description Values 15 3 Reserved 0 2 Idle 0 no idle notification 1 idle notification 1 Consumption inhibited 0 consumption started 1 no consumption 0 Production inhibited 0 production started 1 no production 1A34009 10 2014 253 CIP objects Services The EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class _ Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All x x Returns the value of all attributes 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single X Returns the value of the specified attribute 4C 76 Get_and_Clear x Returns and clears the values of all instance attributes X supported not supported 254 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics Object Overview The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 353 hex 851 decimal Instance
171. ception Response Codes The MODBUS exception response codes include the following Status Hex Dec Response Description 0x8101 33025 Illegal Function The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server or slave This may be because the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented in the unit selected It could also indicate that the server or slave is in the wrong state to process a request of this type This code is also returned when attempting to write to a read only attribute 0x8102 33026 Illegal Data Address The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server or slave More specifically the combination of reference number and transfer length is invalid 0x8103 33027 Illegal Data Value A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for server or slave This indicates an invalid request structure It specifically does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a register has a value outside the expectation of the application program because the MODBUS protocol does not test the significance of any particular register value 0x8104 33028 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable event occurred while the server or slave was attempting to perform the requested action 0x8105 33029 Acknowledge Specialized use in conjunction with programm
172. ciated with the selected Source IP Address EtherNet IP Network Detecti on area Begin detection range address The starting IP address of the address range for automatic field bus discovery of EtherNet IP devices End detection range address The ending IP address of the address range for automatic field bus discovery of EtherNet IP devices Modbus TCP Network Detection area Begin detection range address The starting IP address of the address range for automatic field bus discovery of Modbus TCP devices End detection range address The ending IP address of the address range for automatic field bus discovery of Modbus TCP devices 60 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Channel Properties Switch Settings Description Use the Switch tab of the Switch page to e enable or disable each of the four Ethernet ports on the BMX NOC 0401 communication module e view and edit the Baud Rate for each port which includes both the e transmission speed and e duplex mode NOTE The Ethernet communication module supports only the Ethernet II frame type The Switch page looks like this Switch QoS Queue Enabled Baud Rate Yes Auto 10 100Mbits s Yes Auto 10 100Mbits s Yes Auto 10 100Mbits s Yes Auto 10 100Mbits s OK Cancel Apply To display this page select the Channel Properties Switch node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor then
173. click on the Switch tab NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Properties This page presents the following properties Name Description Port read only The Ethernet port number 1 4 Enabled The active status of the port e Yes enabled e No disabled Baud The transmission speed and duplex mode for the network Values include Rate Auto 10 100 Mb default 100 Mb Half 100 Mb Full 10 Mb Half e 10 Mb Full NOTE Schneider Electric recommends the default setting Auto 10 100 Mb This setting causes the connected devices to perform auto negotiation and thereby determine the fastest common transmission rate and duplex mode 1A34009 10 2014 61 Configuring Channel Properties QoS Queue Description The BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module can be configured to sort packets it receives by placing them into one of 4 separate queues based upon their priority very high high low very low and handle each packet in the order of its priority The module also can be configured to add a differentiated service code point DSCP value to each packet it originates indicating the relative priority of the packet The process of packet queuing and DSCP tagging together enable the module to perform Ethernet packet traffic management Use the QoS Queue tab of the Channel Properties Switch
174. column type in the name of the variable assigned to the RECP pin ReceivedData and hit Enter The animation table displays the ReceivedData variable Expand the ReceivedData variable to display its word array where you can view the CIP response contained in the ReceivedData variable EA Receimeanata n A E Modification Force LAR LF s H Ei eae e o a a E ReceivedData ARRAY 0 49J OF INT ReceivedData 0 16 00D0 INT ReceivedData 1 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 2 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 3 16 0001 INT ReceivedData 4 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 5 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 6 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 7 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 8 16 0000 INT OCC CCC CCE ReceivedData 9 _ 16 0000 INT _ ReceivedData 10 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 11 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 12 16 0000 INT Note Each array entry presents 2 bytes of data in little endian format where the least significant byte is stored in the smallest memory address For example CE in word 0 is the lower byte and 00 is the upper byte 286 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Write Modbus Object Overview The following unconnected explicit messaging example shows you how to use the DATA EXCH function block to write data to a re
175. company com carl company com Circuit breaker activated To display this page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the Email field to Enabled The Email node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the Email node in the navigation tree 1A34009 10 2014 93 Configuring Viewing and Configuring Email Settings The configurable Email service parameters include the following Parameter Description SMTP Server Configuration SMTP Server IP Address The IP address of the Email server that will relay Email messages SMTP Server Port TCP port used by the Email server Default 25 Password Authentication Authentication Is client authentication by the Email server e Disabled default e Enabled Login If the Email server is configured for client authentication the user name up to 64 characters Password If the Email server is configured for client authentication the client password string up to 64 characters Email Header 1 3 From The Email address of the sender up to 64 characters To The Email addresses of the recipients up to 128 characters Subject The static part of the Email message up to 32 characters 94 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Send
176. configuration page see page 105 before the input and output variables were created Asa result clicking the Update application button in the Ethernet communication module Configuration page generated the following collection of variables CI ox Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter T X Name fF EDT MDT J IODDT PA _ NOC01_IN T_NOC01_IN MW1 H A _NOCO1_LS1_IN T_NOCO1_LS1_IN MW17 T_NIC2212_01_IN MW21_ E BB NIC2212 01_IN HA NOCOI_OUT T_NOC01_OUT MW101 H NOC01_LS1_OUT T_NOC01_LS1_OUT MW117 H E NIC2212 01 _0UT_ T_NIC2212_01_0UT_ mw118 gt 194 S1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Notice how the address locations for the remote EtherNet IP device have shifted e inputs NIC2212_01_IN have shifted from MW17 to MW21 e outputs NIC2212_01_OUT have shifted from MW117 to MW118 This shift of MW input and output memory address assignments occurs because the local slave was activated and local slave I O variables are placed in a located memory address position ahead of remote EtherNet IP device I O variables A similar shift of addresses would occur with respect to both local slave and EtherNet IP device I O variable addresses if a Modbus TCP remote device is activated This is because Modbus TCP device I O variables are places in a located memory address position ahead of both local slave and EtherNet IP I O variables As st
177. ct exchange number 16 0D No telegram received 16 0E Incorrect length 16 0F Telegram service not configured 16 10 Network module missing 16 11 Request missing 16 12 Application server already active 1A34009 10 2014 395 Detected Error Codes Value Communication report least significant byte 16 13 UNI TE V2 transaction number incorrect 16 FF Message refused NOTE The function can detect a parameter error before activating the exchange In this case the activity bit remains at 0 and the report is initialized with values corresponding to the detected error Operation Report This report byte is specific to each function and specifies the result of the operation on the remote application Value Operation report most significant byte 16 05 Length mismatch CIP 16 07 Bad IP address 16 08 Application error 16 09 Network is down 16 0A Connection reset by peer 16 0C Communication function not active 16 0D e Modbus TCP transaction timed out e EtherNet IP request timeout 16 0F No route to remote host 16 13 Connection refused 16 15 e Modbus TCP no resources e EtherNet IP no resources to handle the message or an internal detected error or no buffer available or no link available or cannot send message 16 16 Remote address not allowed 16 18 e Modbus TCP concurrent connections o
178. ction Settings window accept the Modbus Node ID default setting of 1 select TCP IP and click the Settings button W Connection Settings Connection Type Modbus Node ID C Serial W 1 247 TCP IP Settings Cancel The TCP IP Parameters dialog opens below 8 Inthe Remote IP Address field type in the IP address for the STB NIC 2212 in this example 192 168 1 6 TCP IP Parameters Parameters Remote Name Remote IP Address 192 1168 11 i 6 Derive IP from MAC IP lt gt Name Cancel 9 Click OK to close the TCP IP Parameters dialog and click OK again to close the Connection Settings dialog 10 Select Online Connect The Data Transfer dialog opens below Data Transfer a The Configuration in the workspace does not match the configuration 1 in the connected island Please select one of the following options Download into the island disabled No configuration data available Download Cancel 140 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 11 Select Upload in the Data Transfer dialog The island workspace is populated with island data and shows the STB NIC 2212 and the island modules below 2 i ey 5 D 3 Gd o 2 cig a a F m x 600000 7 poso T o _ Note A box appears beneath each module containing one or two integers for example 3 1 These integers serve the following purpose e The left
179. ctions established Services DO O Function Status DHCP Server Enabled FDR Server Enabled QoS Tagging Enabled IGMP Snooping Enabled Access Control Enabled Port Mirroring Enabled RSTP Enabled Network Time Service Enabled Email Service Enabled Scanner Status 7 il Not Configured Copyright 2000 2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 368 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet Status Summary If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER Status Summary Data The LEDs section of the page can present the following operational states LED Color Text Descriptions RUN Green Ready for operation Gray Not ready for operation ERR Red Fault detected Gray No fault detected ETH STS Green In operation Red Duplicate IP Waiting for BootP server response Default IP Address in use IP Address Configuration conflict detected MS module status Green In operation Red Not configured Fault detected Recoverable fault detected NS network status Green Connections established Red No EtherNet IP connections Connection error detected Duplicate IP addre
180. d Input bit Output Output bit J Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root DataReceived DataReceived Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply Click OK to close the Items window Select File Save to save your edits 1A34009 10 2014 113 Configuring Using Local Slave Inputs and Outputs The inputs and outputs created above are used as follows e The third party device updates values of the following variables e ProductionTotal_LineA e ProductionTotal_LineB e Events_LineA e Events_LineB e The Ethernet communication module updates value of the DataReceived variable in the third party device at the configured RPI 114 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 3 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Overview This chapter presents examples of how to add devices to and how to configure these device for operations on your Ethernet network What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 3 1 Hardware Catalog 116 3 2 Adding an EtherNet IP Device to the Network 124 3 3 Adding a Modbus TCP Device to the Network 156 1A34009 10 2014 115 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Section 3 1 Hardware Catalog Overview
181. d the Field Bus Discovery dialog box is displayed listing the scanned and matched devices Select the matched devices to be created in the Unity Pro project which then shows up in the Selected Devices list Field bus discovery xi NOC01 Channel EtherNet IP Protocol 0 Scanned Devices Name Address Typeld Vendor Version Serial 1734 AENT Ethernet IP Adapter 192 168 1 11 12 108 1 2 1 437850353 STB NIC 22121n19 Out6 192 168 1 6 12 2213 243 2 10 102498786 Matched Devices Match Type Vendor Version Date STB NIC 22121n19 Out6 Exact device Schneider Electric 2 10 2009 12 08 E eI Selected Devices Name Address Match Typeld Vendor _ L STB NIC 22121n19 Out6 192 168 1 6 Exact device Schneider Electric Select the devices to be added in the project Cancel This dialog presents these lists List Description Scanned Devices The devices matched and unmatched found during the scan Matched Devices The matched DTMs found in the workstation DTM catalog for the device that you selected in the Scanned Devices list Each time a scanned device is selected in the Scanned Devices list the contents of the Matched Devices list is updated to display the matched device DTMs found for the selected scanned device The matching process can yield one or more matched devices for a given scanned device In this case only one DTM was discovered for the selected scanne
182. d device Selected Devices This list displays the device DTMs that have been selected in the Matched Devices list which will be added to the Unity Pro project 50 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring The lists use the following colored icons Color Meaning Green The device has been selected Yellow The device has been matched Red The device has not been matched Black Information about the address of the scanned device e Inthe Scanned Devices list the device has an address identical to one of the DTMs in the Unity Pro project e Inthe Matched Devices list the device will be assigned an address identical to one of the DTMs in the Unity Pro project NOTE An icon can consist of two colors For example a search can discover a device that e has a matching DTM and e has an IP address identical to a device already added to the Unity Pro application In this case the icon next to the discovered device would be half yellow and half black before it is selected and e half green and half black after it is selected This dialog has five buttons Button Use this button to Add All Automatically add the most closely matched according to the matching types listed above es device DTM for each found device in the Matched Devices list to the Selected Devices list Add One Add the matched device DTM selected in the Matched Devices list Remove Remove one or m
183. de is set to Manual 4 Click Apply to save your edits and leave the window open for further edits 162 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring the Address Setting Page Use the Address Setting page to e configure the IP address for the remote device e enable or disable DHCP client software for the remote device When the DHCP client software is enabled in the remote device it will obtain its IP address from the DHCP server in the Ethernet communication module The Address Setting page looks like this Properties Address Setting Request Setting l Change Address IP Address Address Server DHCP for this device Enabled 7 Identified by Device Name z Identifier NIP2212_01 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 1A34009 10 2014 163 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network The following settings are used in this sample configuration Use settings that are appropriate for your actual application Step Action 1 In the Address Settings page edit the following IP Address By default e the first three octet values equal the first three octet values of the Ethernet communication module and e the fourth octet value equals this device Number setting in this case 004 In this example the IP address is 192 169 1 7 DHCP for this Device e Enabled activates the DHCP client in this device
184. delivering various application service messages Understanding messages allocating network bandwidth among messages and determining the time required for a message to traverse the network are all major performance considerations of your control application design What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Message Types 209 Message Connection Types 211 TCP and CIP Connections 213 Message Priority 214 Messaging Performance 215 Message Frequency 216 Allocating Network Bandwidth 218 Estimating Message Traverse and Response Times 220 208 S1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Message Types Overview Two types of industrial Ethernet message types are supported by the Ethernet communication module Message Type Includes Explicit e Non time critical management data e Read write application data Implicit e Real time I O data e Real time control data e Real time synchronization data Explicit Messages Explicit messages transmit information used for device configuration and diagnostics and for data collection In explicit messaging the client issues a request the server receives processes and sends a response back to the client You can specify a response timeout value indicating how long the client waits for a response from the server If the client does not receive a response from the server within the response ti
185. dule select the node named NIP2212_01 The Device Editor displays the following pages e Properties e Address Setting e Request Setting NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Configuring the Properties Page Use the Properties page to e add the remote device to or remove it from the configuration e edit the base name for variables and data structures used by the remote device e indicate how input and output items will be created and edited The Properties page for an STB NIP 2212 network interface module looks like this Properties Address Setting Request Setting Properties Number 004 Active Configuration Enabled gt Comment ft Default Name r Input Structure Name T_NIP2212_01_IN Variable Name NIP2212_01_IN r Output Structure Name T_NIP2212_01_OUT Variable Name NIP2212_01_OUT r lO Structure Name Items Management Import Mode Manual z Reimport Items OK Cancel Apply 1A34009 10 2014 161 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network The following settings are used in this sample configuration Use settings that are appropriate for your actual application Step Action 1 In the Properties section of the page edit the following Number The relative position of the device in the list from 0 127 For this example accept the default
186. dule node in the DTM Browser then select Edit gt Connect The Modbus TCP Explicit Message window below presents an example of both the configuration of a Modbus TCP explicit message and the response In this example the explicit message is used to read 2 registers in the remote STB NIP 2212 network interface module starting at offset 5391 m Address Service Data IP Address 192 168 1 7 Number 3 Start Address 5391 Name ReadHoldingRegisters Quantity 2 Read Device Id Code Basic Device Identity 7 z Object Id 0 a Unit ID 255 Send to Device J l Repeat 500ms m Response 00 06 00 00 as Status Status 0 0x0 description ModbuxNoError 302 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Sending Explicit Messages To send an explicit message to a target Modbus TCP device Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module that is upstream of the target device Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt Modbus Explicit Message Result The Modbus Explicit Message window opens Configure the explicit message using the following fields IP Address The IP address of the target device used to identify the target of the explicit message In this example 192 168 1 7 Start Address A component of the addressing path In this example 5391 Quantity A component of the addressing path In this exa
187. e The object specific status indicates which part of the key check was unsuccessful 26 Path size invalid The size of the path that was sent with the service request is either not large enough to allow the request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included 27 Unexpected attribute in list An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time 28 Invalid member ID The member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified class instance attribute 29 Member not settable A request to modify a non modifiable member was received 2A Group 2 only server This detected error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 general error only servers with 4 Kb or less code space and only in place of service not supported attribute not support or attribute not settable 2B Unknown Modbus error A CIP to Modbus translator received an unknown Modbus exception code 2C Attribute not gettable A request to read a non readable attribute was received 2D CF Reserved by CIP for future extensions DO FF Reserved for object class This range of detected error codes is used to indicate object class specific detected errors Use this range only when none of the codes presented in this table accurately reflect the error that is detected 1A34009 10 2014 401 CIP General Status Codes 402 1A34009 10 2014 Appendix C Modbus Exception Response Codes MODBUS Ex
188. e Diagnostics page Schneider FU eles amp Electric ea L Monitoring Documentation 4 Diagnostics Status Summary Rack Viewer E Ethernet Processor Load Scanner Status Messaging QoS Configuration S Switch Port Statistics Redundancy Network Time Service Email Properties Copyright 1998 2010 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved To access a monitoring service click on either of the following links e Status Summary see page 368 e Rack Viewer see page 371 e Ethernet e Processor Load see page 373 e Scanner Status see page 375 e Messaging see page 377 e QoS Configuration see page 379 e Switch e Port Statistics see page 380 e Redundancy see page 382 e Network Time Service see page 385 Email see page 383 e Properties see page 387 1A34009 10 2014 367 Embedded Web Pages Status Summary Introduction Use the Status Summary page to view the status of e the LEDs see page 306 located on the front of the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module e the Ethernet services see page 73 supported by the communication module e the communication module in its role as e scanner e Modbus TCP server e EtherNet IP messaging server Status Summary Display The Status Summary page looks like this STATUS SUMMARY RUN Ready for Operation ERR M No Fault Detected ETH STS heal In Operation MS gt In Operation NS gt Conne
189. e EtherNet IP protocol since last reset in packets per second Modbus TCP Activity The number of I O messages received by the module using the Modbus TCP protocol since last reset in packets per second Module Processor Utilization The percent of Ethernet communication module processor capacity used by the present level of communication activity 316 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Email Diagnostics Diagnosing SMTP Transmissions Use the Email Diagnostic page to display dynamically generated data describing the communication module s Email message transmissions NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect The Email Diagnostic page looks like this Ethernet Diagnostic Bandwidth Diagnostic RSTP Diagnostic Email Diagnostic Network Time Service Diagnostic V Refresh Every 500ms 192 Email Diagnostics Email Service o Remote Email Server Status SMTP Server IP Address 192 168 To 10 Last Email Header Used Sender operator1 company com Receivers merle mainoffice com Subject Pump 1 pumping mud Merle shut her down N Number of Emails Sent Number of Errors 0 Time Since Last Email 280 Secs Email Server Not Reachable 0 Times Last Error 16 5104 Click the Reset C
190. e load on an Ethernet control network consists of cyclic real time I O data Consequently carefully consider how to set the RPI value for transmitting these messages e Asmall RPI value results in more frequent and more numerous message transmissions This increases network load and may waste network resources and degrade system performance e Conversely a larger RPI value for example one that is equal or nearly equal to the frequency of your application s need for new data can result in your application not receiving the most current data Also if a connection is lost the time to re establish the connection will be relatively long because the connection timeout is proportional to the RPI Schneider Electric recommends setting RPI to 50 of the actual frequency by which your application requires data for cyclic real time I O messaging NOTE The I O scanner can simultaneously communicate with different I O adapters at different RPI rates This enhances the ability of the PLC to control and monitor different devices with varying processing capacities Change of State I O Messaging For change of state triggered real time I O data messages e output transmissions occur at the rate of the PLC controller application cycle time e input transmissions occur whenever an input event is detected by an input device Consequently for an I O device with a rapid response and transmission time using a direct connection to the I O device may be
191. e network load e message priority Message Traverse Time can be estimated by determining the transmission delay the store and forward delay of intermediate network devices and counting the number of such devices Assuming each forwarding device is a switch and each switch presents the same transmission delay the following formula can be used Message Traverse Time Switch Transmission Delay x Number of Switches Schneider Electric recommends that you estimate a worst case Message Traverse Time as follows Step Description 1 Determine the worst case network load 2 Obtain switch performance information under varying network loads and use the worst case i e the largest transmission delay value 3 Determine the logical network topology that yields the longest path i e the greatest number of switches through which a message passes 4 Using the largest transmission delay value and the largest number of forwarding switches use the formula above to calculate a worst cast Message Traverse Time Message Response Time After calculating Message Traverse Time above you can next measure Message Response Time which measures the total time required for e a message to travel from a client device over the network to a server e the message to be processed by the server e the server response to travel back to the client over the network Message Response Time can be calculated as follows Mes
192. e number at the top of the table which instead displays a constant value NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect The Ethernet Diagnostic page looks like this Ethernet Diagnostic Bandwidth Diagnostic l Refresh Every 500ms Group Parameters Port 1 112 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Internal Port General Interface Speed Interface Flags Duplex mode Negotiation Status T Manual Settings Require Reset Local Hardware Fault Physical Address Input Octets __ Unicast Packets _ Non Unicast Packets Discards Errors Unknown Protocols Output __ Octets __ Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Description 100 Active link Active link Inactive link Inactive link Active link Full duplex Full duplex Indetermined Indetermined Full duplex Successfully n Successfully n Auto negotiat Auto negotia Successfully n Interface cana Interface cana Interface cana Interface ca Interface can No 08 80 F4 01 FC 08 80 F4 01 F 08 80 F4 01 F 08 80 F4 01 08 80 F4 01 11620142 17820149 24183465 23657898 6687904 52909 103124 0 0 0 41311209 5467812 6454123 4131129 7181139 53514 40 100 100 100 100 No No No No 72907 654879 8994 546756 33 36 37180 658112 0 3680 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67345 75698 96123 73575 125 215
193. e of the main menu selections for example Setup Select a page name from the list of pages on the left side of the page for example Security The following dialog opens Connect to 192 168 1 4 l i 2 xI The server 192 168 1 4 at Schneider Web requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name a USER gt Password eooo J Remember my password Carce Type in the required Username and Password combination then click OK NOTE In the above example the settings for both the Username and Password remain set to the default setting of USER S1A34009 10 2014 349 Embedded Web Pages Editing the Username and Passwords The single username and both passwords can be edited in the Security web page To edit username and passwords follow these steps Step Description 1 Navigate to and open the web server see page 348 using the IP address of the communication module The Home page opens 2 From the Home page click on the Setup main menu item If required input the username and web page password see page 349 The Setup page opens Schneider EW elesiZ O Electric Hifi Documentation URL Ee a Ps eee 8 Setup cl Setup Security Port Mirroring Copyright 1998 2010 Schneider Automation SAS A
194. e page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties S1A34009 10 2014 63 Configuring QoS Queue Mapping Settings DSCP settings have a range of 0 63 The range of Queue Mapping settings are set forth below Group Traffic Type Available Group Queue Settings Precision Time Control Point to point event e Very High e High Point to point general High e Low e Very Low lEtherNet IP Control Urgent e High Scheduled e Low e Very Low High Low Explicit Modbus TCP Control Modbus I O e High e Low Modbus Explicit e Very Low Network Time Protocol NTP Control e Very High e High e Low e Very Low 1 Edits to these properties are synchronized with the Services QoS page see page 86 2 Editable only in Advanced Mode 64 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Channel Properties TCP IP Page Description Use the TCP IP page to e select a Configuration mode which specifies how the communication module obtains its IP addressing settings and e edit the IP addressing settings that will be used if the Configuration mode is set to Static NOTE The settings made in this page can either match or conflict with the manual settings made using the 2 rotary switches on the back of the module See the Resolving Conflicting Hardware and Software IP Address Settings topic for an explanation of when IP addressing conflicts exist and how the module resolves them The TCP IP page
195. e same as defined by the DTM EDS it emulates the DTM EDS definitions e None no checking occurs the identity portion of the connection is omitted e Custom enables the following 6 parameter settings to be set individually For this example select Disable If Check identity is set to Custom complete the following 6 fields Compatibility True for each of the following selected tests the DTM EDS and remote device need Mode only be compatible e False for each of the following selected tests the DTM EDS and remote device need to match exactly Minor Version For each of the parameters to the left select one of the following settings Major Version e Compatible include the parameter in the test e Not checked the parameter is not included in the test Product Code Product Type Product Vendor 7 Click OK to save your settings The next step is to configure I O settings 138 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Connecting to the Advantys STB Island Overview In this example you will use the Advantys configuration software running on your PC to e connect the Advantys configuration software to the STB NIC 2212 and the 8 I O modules that comprise the Advantys STB island e upload Advantys STB island configuration to the Advantys configuration software in your PC e display a fieldbus image for the Advantys STB island showing the relative location of e status information e input data e out
196. e to create a hierarchical logical network topology RSTP is a flexible protocol that can be implemented on many physical topologies including ring mesh or a combination of ring and mesh Recommendation Schneider Electric recommends the following practices Use RSTP instead of STP RSTP provides a faster recovery time than STP NOTE Recovery time is the time that elapses between the moment a broken link is detected to the moment network service is restored Recovery time depends on the number of switches in the topology the more switches the longer the recovery time the processing speed of the switches in the topology the slower the speed the longer the recovery time the bandwidth traffic load and topology pattern If the switch is part of a topology with redundant physical paths enable RSTP If the switch is part of a topology that does not include redundant physical paths disable RSTP in this case disabling RSTP improves network performance 1A34009 10 2014 203 Optimizing Performance Virtual Local Area Network VLAN Introduction Use VLANs to divide a larger network into smaller virtual groups of devices and to split a switch into many virtual network switches VLANs permit the creation of logically separate groups of network devices without having to physically re wire those devices When a switch receives a message directed to a specific VLAN it forwards that message only to the switch ports connected t
197. e x X Returns the value of the specified attribute 10 16 Set_Attribute_Single1 X Sets the value of the gt specified attribute X supported not supported 1 The Set_Attribute_Single service can execute only when these preconditions are satisfied e Configure the Ethernet communication module to obtain its IP address from flash memory e Confirm that the PLC is in stop mode 240 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Ethernet Link Object Overview The Ethernet Link object consists of the instances attributes and services described below Class ID F6 hex 246 decimal Instance IDs The Ethernet Link object presents the following instance values class port 1 port 2 port 3 port 4 ahwWwN AoO Attributes internal port The Ethernet Link object presents the following attributes Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X 03 Number of Instances X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 5 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 01 01 Interface Speed UDINT x Valid values include 0 10000000 100000000 X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 241 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 02
198. ect you are asked if you want to continue and replace the existing project device s e Yes Proceed to the next step e No Cancel automatic field bus discovery The device properties dialog below opens displaying the default name for the first discovered device to be added Properties of device y xj General Device Information DTM Information Protocol Information DTM name management Alias name STBNIC2212_from_EDS Tag name Default I O vision management Default input I O vision Variable name STBNIC2212_from_EDS_IN Default output I O vision Variable name STBNIC2212_from_EDS_OUT cancel Hee In the General page of the device properties dialog type in the Alias name for the device to be added then click OK The dialog closes then re opens if there is another device to be added to the application 10 Repeat the above step for each additional discovered device 11 After you finish adding devices to the application configure each device for operation as part of the application e Disconnect the Ethernet communication module from its DTM In the DTM Browser select the Ethernet communication module then select Edit Disconnect e Configure the new device properties in the DTMs for both the Ethernet communication module and the newly added remote device 1A34009 10 2014 49 Configuring Field Bus Discovery Dialog If at least one matched device has been foun
199. ect of Activating and De activating Devices on I O MW Memory Addresses 0 0 0 e cece e eee ee eee eee eee 193 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 5 Optimizing Performance 197 5 1 Selecting a Switch 000 002 ee 198 Role of a Switch in an Ethernet Network 000055 199 Transmission Speed Duplex and Auto Negotiation 200 Quality of Service QOS 2 eee 201 IGMP Snooping 0 cee eae 202 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 000 eee eae 203 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 0 0000 eee eee eee 204 Port MINOHING 0 05 atar c nation Better ace were eed cee ee eds 206 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Agent 207 5 2 Control Application Design 0 0 eee ee 208 Message Type orii eee ede i E een eh Qu park kee A 209 Message Connection Types 0 00 cee eee eee 211 TCP and CIP Connections 0 0 0 c cee eee 213 Message Priority 000000 cece eee 214 Messaging Performance 0000 cece eee eee eeeee 215 Message Frequency 4 22e 8es scan ve bee bbe eye ey ve evae 216 Allocating Network Bandwidth 002200 cee eae 218 Estimating Message Traverse and Response Times 220 5 3 Projecting Ethernet Network Performance 222 Network Load and Bandwidth Calculation Example 222 Chapter 6 CIP Objects xsi cnidesiasadsinceaae wean wend
200. ect type Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All X x Returns the value of all attributes X supported not supported 256 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics List Object Overview The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics List object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 354 hex 852 decimal Instance IDs The EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics List object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 N instance Attributes EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics List object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision x 02 Max Instance x X supported not supported Instance ID 1 to N instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 01 Number of connections UINT X Total number of opened explicit connections X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 257 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 02 Explicit Messaging ARRAY of X Connections Diagnostic STRUCT List Originator connection UDINT O gt T connection ID ID
201. ection Manager object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 01 01 Open Requests UINT x x Number of Forward Open service requests received 02 02 Open Format UINT x X Number of Forward Open service Rejects requests that were rejected due to bad format 03 03 Open Resource UINT X X Number of Forward Open service Rejects requests that were rejected due to lack of resources 04 04 Open Other UINT x x Number of Forward Open service Rejects requests that were rejected for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 233 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 05 05 Close Requests UINT x x Number of Forward Close service requests received 06 06 Close Format UINT x x Number of Forward Close service Requests requests that were rejected due to bad format 07 07 Close Other UINT x x Number of Forward Close service Requests requests that were rejected for reasons other than bad format 08 08 Connection UINT x x Total number of connection timeouts Timeouts that occurred
202. ed Mode on and off Step Action 1 Close both the Diagnosis Window and every instance of the Device Editor before attempting to toggle Advanced Mode on or off NOTE If the Device Editor or the Diagnosis Window is open the Advanced Mode status on or off cannot be changed In the DTM Browser right click the communication module Result A pop up menu opens To toggle ON advanced mode select Device Menu Advanced Mode To toggle OFF advanced mode repeat steps 1 through 3 above 1A34009 10 2014 47 Configuring Field Bus Discovery Service Introduction Use the field bus discovery service to detect and add to your Unity Pro application network devices that are situated on a local network The field bus discovery service is available only when the Ethernet communication module DTM is connected to its physical device Only the first level devices below the communication DTM are detected Performing Field Bus Discovery The results of the scanning process is compared to the registered DTMs in the DTM catalog of the computer If a match is found in the DTM catalog for a scanned device the results are accompanied with a matching type that gives the accuracy of the match These are the available matching types e Exact match Every identification attribute matches The correct device type was found e Generic match At least the Vendor and device Type ID attributes match The sup
203. ed with EtherNet IP Server Maximum number of simultaneous requests 128 requests Maximum number of simultaneous connections 32 connections Maximum message size Read 250 bytes 125 words excluding header Write 240 bytes 120 words excluding header 20 1A34009 10 2014 Installation Mounting the BMX NOC 0401 Module Tools Required One medium sized size 2 Phillips head screw driver Mounting the Module The module can be mounted in any of the racks of the Modicon M340 system It can be installed in any available slot except in the offset X Bus racks To mount the communication module Step Action Illustration 1 Position the locating pins situated at the bottom part of the rear of the module in the corresponding slots 2 Swivel the module upwards toward the top of the rack so that the back of the module sits flush with the rack NOTE Before positioning the pins remove the pins protective cover 3 Tighten the screw to hold the module in place on the rack NOTE The tightening torque is 1 5 N m 13 3 Ib in 1A34009 10 2014 21 Installation Wiring A WARNING HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR BURN Connect the ground wire to the protective ground PE terminal before you establish any further connections When you remove connections disconnect the ground wire last The Ethernet cable shield must be co
204. em s button to create one or several items OK Cancel Apply Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens Item Name Definition E xi Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s Item Name 00232 n aata dt i _ _ SCS cant _ tte Note The asterisk indicates a series of discrete items with the same root name will be created 1A34009 10 2014 147 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 9 Accept the default Item Name and click OK 2 discrete input items are created Input Input bit Output Output bit Default Item Name Root cA _ Offset Device Offset Connection Position in Byte __ Item Name T 0 0 DDI3232_in_data_x0 L D0233 in deta 1 DDI3232_in_data_IX1 2 ee Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 o o o ojojo of Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items OK Cancel Apply 10 Click Apply to save the items and leave the page open 11 Repeat steps 6 10 for each group of discrete input items you need to create In this example that includes items for each of the following groups Byte 0 Bits 2 3 Default Items Name Root DDI3230_in_st Byte 0 Bits 4 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3200_out_echo Byte 0 Bits 6 7 Default Items Name Root D
205. emote device its editable parameter settings What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Accessing CIP Objects 260 Editing Port Configuration Properties for Remote EtherNet IP Devices 262 Pinging a Network Device 264 Viewing and Editing Online Settings for a Remote Device 266 1A34009 10 2014 259 Online Action Accessing CIP Objects Overview Use the Module Information page of the Online Action window to e retrieve and display current data describing the state of CIP objects for the selected communication module or remote EtherNet IP device and e reset the selected communication module or remote EtherNet IP device NOTE Before you can perform online actions for a communication module or remote device connect its DTM to the physical module or device To do this select the module or device node in the DTM Browser then select Edit gt Connect The appearance of this page and the CIP object information you can retrieve depend upon the operating mode of the Unity Pro software In this mode You can display data for these CIP objects Standard mode Identity object see page 229 Advanced mode e Identity object see page 47 e Connection Manager object see page 233 e TCP IP Interface object see page 239 e Ethernet Link object e QoS object see page 237 The Module Information page looks like this Module Information Port Co
206. ems e output word items 1A34009 10 2014 173 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Creating Input Word Items To create input items for the STB NIP 2212 example beginning with an input word for the DDI 3230 input module Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module DTM Browser 1 i xi Ay Host PC SRE lt 192 168 1 4 gt NOCO1 B lt EtherNet IP 192 168 1 6 gt NIC2212_01 B lt Modbus 192 168 1 7 gt NIP2212_01 Do one of the following inthe main menu select Edit Open or click the right mouse button then select Open in the pop up menu The Device Editor opens displaying the DTM for the communication module In the left pane of the Device Editor navigate to and select the Items node for the STB NIP 2212 network interface module Channel Properties Services EtherNet IP Local Slaves Device List 003 NIC2212_01 lt EIP 192 168 1 6 gt 004 NIP2212_01 lt MDB 192 168 1 7 gt in Request 1 Items Logging 174 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 Select the Input tab to open that page Input bit Output Output bit Offset Connection ItemName lal Default Item Name Root BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 DOAN DHAR WN F Ei Select a zone and click on the
207. en when the button is released Graphic objects are not designed to be used to control situations like this unless other interlock methods are installed in the system NOTE You can only modify the value of data items that are defined as read write in the Unity Pro application To use the Data Editor to edit data follow these steps Step Description 1 In the data template spreadsheet double click on the item you want to write data to The Data Editor configuration area opens displaying the fields for the selected item In the Value field type in the desired data value Click Apply The Enter password dialog opens Enter password Password OK Cancel In the Password field type in the Write Data password NOTE The default password is USER Click OK The new value is sent to the controller 364 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Data Editor Lite Overview Data Editor Lite is a version of the Data Editor that is smaller in size and therefore faster to download especially for use via a dial up connection Data Editor Lite presents the same interface as the Data Editor with the exception that its toolbar does not include the Read PLC Symbols function HAKAA Rate 500 IP address 192 168 1 4 Empty Symbol Value Format Status Symbol Address Type Format x Value Read only Apply Reset Variables Data Edito
208. er through the CPU s Ethernet port or other supported programming paths 222 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Network Diagram The proposed network diagram looks like this Ethernet Communication Module Remote I O Scanner D Unity Pro and Advantys A Ethemet switch il One po oo SP oOoooooo 0e a0 Oe e poeg mn a swa oN we 1 0 modules YO modules Remote I O Adapter A Remote I O Adapter B Network Load and Bandwidth Limits When performing calculations keep in mind that the Ethernet module and remote devices cannot exceed their implicit messaging and bandwidth limits Device Load Limits Bandwidth Limits Ethernet Communication Module 12000 pps 80 Mbps I O Adapter A 8000 pps 70 Mbps I O Adapter B 8000 pps 70 Mbps I O Drive C 8000 pps 70 Mbps O Scanner D 12000 pps 80 Mbps Switch 16000 pps 90 Mbps 1A34009 10 2014 223 Optimizing Performance Remote Device Connections and RPI For the purpose of this example it is assumed that the remote devices require the following numbers of CIP connections and are configured for the stated requested packet interval RPI settings Device CIP I O Connections RPI Setting I O Packet Size I O Adapter A 5 20 ms 8000 bits I O Adapter B 2 30 ms 4096 bits I O Drive C 2 30 ms
209. erviceS 0 0 cee eee 275 Configuring EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 277 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Get_Attribute_Single 279 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Modbus Object 283 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Write Modbus Object 287 8 3 Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 291 Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Function Codes 292 Configuring Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 293 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Register Request 295 8 4 Explicit Messaging via the Unity ProGUI 04 299 Sending Explicit Messages to EtherNet IP Devices 300 Sending Explicit Messages to Modbus TCP Devices 302 Chapter 9 DiaQnostcs scx cws we ee ase Peete nannan 305 9 1 Module Hardware Diagnostics 0 eee eee 306 LED Indicators for the BMX NOC 0401 2 2 005 306 9 2 Unity Pro Software Diagnostics 2 0002000 eee eaee 308 Using the Diagnostic Window 0 000 002 eee eee 309 Ethernet Port Diagnostics 0000 00 e eee 311 Bandwidth Diagnostics 0 0000 c eee eee 314 Email Diagnostics 0 000 c eee eee 317 Network Time Service Diagnostics 0020000005 319 Communication Module RSTP Diagnostics 322 Local Slave Connection Diagnostics 5 325 Local S
210. es E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 1 NA ONDARWHD Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several item s OK Cancel Apply Click Apply to save the new items and leave the page open Repeat steps 2 6 for each group of discrete output items you need to create In this example that includes items for each of the following groups e Byte 0 Bits 2 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3410_out_data e Byte 1 Bits 0 5 Default Items Name Root DDO3600_out_data 8 The next task is to create output bytes and words 1A34009 10 2014 153 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Creating Numeric Output Items To create output items for the STB NIC 2212 example beginning with an output data word for the STB AVO 1250 module Step Action 1 Click on the Output tab to open the following page Input Input bit Output Output bit l Default Item Name Root Offset Device Offset Connection F BLOCKA Item Name Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example both the Offset Device and Offset Connection columns represent the byte address The items you create will be 16 bit words comprising 2 bytes In the Default Item Name Root input box type AVO1250_CH1_out_dat
211. es list displaying ared exclamation point indicating editing has begun and a placeholder IP address of 0 0 0 0 2 Double click the left mouse button on the placeholder IP address The IP address field expands and becomes editable 3 In the new IP address field type in the IP address of the device which will be able to access the communication module then press Enter 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 above for each additional device to which you want to grant access to the communication module 5 Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to save your configuration edits To remove a device from the Authorized Addresses list select its IP address in the list then click Remove The selected IP address is removed 1A34009 10 2014 85 Configuring Configuring QoS Ethernet Packet Tagging Description The Ethernet communication module can be configured to perform Ethernet packet tagging The module supports the OSI layer 3 Quality of Service QoS standard defined in RFC 2475 When you enable QoS the module adds a differentiated services code point DSCP tag to each Ethernet packet it transmits thereby indicating the priority of that packet Use the QoS page to e specify the source of QoS packet priority settings and e view or edit QoS DSCP prioritization values The contents of the QoS page depends on the Ethernet communication module yo
212. eset component request was received while the connection was open 1A34009 10 2014 405 Email Detected Error Response Codes 406 1A34009 10 2014 Glossary DTM D device type manager A DTM is a device driver running on the host PC It provides a unified structure for accessing device parameters configuring and operating the devices and diagnosing events DTMs can range from a simple Graphical User Interface for setting device parameters to a highly sophisticated application capable of performing complex real time calculations for diagnosis and maintenance purposes In the context of a DTM a device can be a communications module or a remote device on the network E Explicit Messaging RPI trap TCP IP based messaging for Modbus TCP and EtherNet IP It is used for point to point client server messages that include both data typically unscheduled information between a client and a server and routing information In EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging is considered Class 3 type messaging and can be connection based or connectionless R requested packet interval The time period between cyclic data transmissions requested by the Scanner EtherNet IP devices will publish data at the rate specified by the RPI assigned to them by the Scanner Modbus TCP devices will receive message requests from the Scanner at each RPI T A trap is an event directed by an SNMP agent that indicates either
213. est Setting Connection Bit Unit ID Health Time Out Repetitive Rate RD Address RD Length Last Value WR Address WR Length 0 255 1500 60 5391 18 Hold Value 0 5 Add Request Remove OK Cancel Apply The Add Request function is enabled only when Import Mode is set to Manual 1A34009 10 2014 165 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network The following settings are used in this sample configuration Use settings that are appropriate for your actual application Step Action 1 In the Request Settings page edit the following Connec Read only The offset for both the health bit and the control bit for this connection Offset values tion Bit are auto generated by the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool starting at O based on the connection type in the following order 1 Modbus TCP connections 2 Local Slave connections 3 EtherNet IP connections NOTE When this Modbus TCP connection is created the offset values for the previously created local slave and EtherNet IP connections are incremented by 1 the local slave connection bit is set to 1 and the EtherNet IP connection bit value is set to 2 UnitID The number of the device or module that is the target of the connection A value of e 255 the default used to access the Ethernet communication module itself 254 causes no Modbus message to be sent the module reports an event 0 253 identifies
214. ew The BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module supports explicit messaging by means of both the EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP protocols To create an explicit message for the EtherNet IP protocol use the DATA EXCH function block in application logic To create an explicit message for the Modbus TCP protocol use any one of the following function blocks in application logic DATA EXCH READ VAR Or WRITE VAR NOTE A single Unity Pro application can contain more than 16 explicit messaging blocks but only 16 explicit messaging blocks can be active at the same time This chapter describes how to configure both EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP explicit messages by using e the DATA EXCH function block in application logic e the Unity Pro graphical user interface What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 8 1 Explicit Messaging Using the DATA_EXCH Block 270 8 2 EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 274 8 3 Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 291 8 4 Explicit Messaging via the Unity Pro GUI 299 1A34009 10 2014 269 Explicit Messaging Section 8 1 Explicit Messaging Using the DATA_EXCH Block Overview This section introduces you to the DATA_EXCH function block which you can use to configure both EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP explicit messages This section describes how to configure the DATA EXCH function bloc
215. ext step is to update the Hardware Catalog see page 120 1A34009 10 2014 123 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Section 3 2 Adding an EtherNet IP Device to the Network Overview This section extends the sample Unity Pro application by describing how to e add an STB NIC 2212 EtherNet IP network interface module to your Unity Pro application e configure the STB NIC 2212 module e configure EtherNet IP connections linking the BMX NOC 0401 communication module and the STB NIC 2212 network interface module e configure I O items for the Advantys Island NOTE The instructions in this chapter describe a single specific device configuration example Refer to the Unity Pro help files for additional information about alternative configuration choices What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Setting Up Your Network 125 Adding an STB NIC 2212 Remote Device 127 Configuring STB NIC 2212 Properties 129 Configuring EtherNet IP Connections 134 Connecting to the Advantys STB Island 139 Configuring I O Items 143 124 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Setting Up Your Network Overview This sample network includes the following hardware and software e a controller rack with BMX CPS 2000 100 240 VAC power supply BMX P34 20302 controller BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module e a remote STB Advantys island with
216. figuring Access Control 84 Configuring QoS Ethernet Packet Tagging 86 Configuring the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 89 Configuring the Email Service 92 Sending Email via the SEND_EMAIL Block 95 Configuring the Network Time Service 97 72 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Enabling Ethernet Services Service List Use the Services page to enable and disable Ethernet services provided by the communications module NOTE After you enable any service you can configure its settings Unity Pro applies default settings to services you enable but elect not to configure The Services page looks like this Access Control Enabled Address Server Enabled QoS Tagging Enabled gt I O Communication Control Enabled 7 RSTP Enabled gt Port Mirroring Enabled gt IGMP Snooping Enabled Network Time Service Enabled gt Email Enabled OK Cancel Apply To display this page select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor After you Enable a service in this page the next step is to configure that service Depending upon the specific service it can be configured in either the Unity Pro Device Editor by selecting a node beneath the Services parent node or in the module s web pages NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties in Unity Pro 1A34009 10 2014 73
217. firmware upgrades and FDR services The module s HTTP FTP and TFTP services can be disabled or enabled using the DTM Browser Security screen HTTP FTP and TFTP services are disabled by default in DTM instances created using BMX NOC 0401 module firmware version 2 04 or later and Unity Pro version 8 1 or later They are enabled by default in instances created using previous versions of Unity Pro You can use Unity Pro to enable or disable HTTP FTP and TFTP services as described in the following procedure If the HTTP FTP or TFTP services have been enabled with Unity Pro they can also be enabled or disabled at run time using a DATA_EXCH function block See the Communication Block Library for Unity Pro Using Unity Pro to Enable and Disable Firmware Upgrade amp FDR and Web Access Services Perform the following steps to enable or disable FTP TFTP or HTTP services on the module Step Action 1 In the Unity Pro main menu select Tools DTM Browser to open the DTM Browser Confirm that the DTM you want to use is not connected to the actual communication module or device If necessary disconnect the DTM from the module or device see page 43 In the DTM Browser select the module Right click and select Open to open the Device Editor Click the Security node in the navigation tree in the left panel to open the Security screen On the Security screen choose the appropriate setting Enabled or Disabled
218. g of module status in progress MWr m MOD 1 Exchange Report Bit 0 detected error while reading module status MWr m MOD 2 Bit 0 internal fault detected Bit 1 operational fault detected Bit 2 not used Bit 3 self test Bit 4 not used Bit 5 configuration fault detected Bit 6 missing module or off Bit 7 not used 1A34009 10 2014 339 Diagnostics Updating channel data To display channel information follow these steps Step Action 1 Configure the READ_STS function block as follows CHr m ch CH Where READ_STS r rack or station number m module or slot number ch channel number set to 0 for ETC transactions To view the data updated by the READ_ STS function block enter the corresponding direct addresses in the Unity Pro Animation table or use them in your program logic Object Description Standard Symbol lr m ch ERR Channel detected error bit CH_ERROR lr m ch 0 Status of Ethernet services Bit 0 EIP Scanner 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 1 EIP Adapter 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 2 EIP Client 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 3 EIP Server 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 4 Modbus scanner 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 5 Modbus TCP Client 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 6 Modbus TCP Server 0 OK 1 NOK Bit 7 FDR Server 0 OK
219. gnostic screen in Unity Pro to check the I O status Accessing Unity Pro Diagnostic Tools To access diagnostic tools for the Ethernet communication module Step Action 1 Open the Unity Pro project backplane diagram below ja PLC Bus a i 15 x Bus J 0 BMX P34 20302 02 40 x 1A34009 10 2014 333 Diagnostics Step Action 2 Do one of the following double click the left mouse button on the communication module in the window above or click the right mouse button on the communication module then select Open Module in the popup menu The Ethernet Module window opens Ethernet 1 Port 10 100RU45 Be ae wt Sn a Run EAR STS PMINOCIOO 2 Mi overview E Fat o obees e Channel 0 ETHERNET MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Model Part Number BMX NOC 04 01 Desoription M340 Ethernet module for Modbus TCP with integrated web server 3 Network Type Ethernet TCP IP Structure Physical interface 4 ports 100 base 7 RJ45 Data rate 10 100 Mbps Services 4 Industrial Protocols Modbus TCP EtherNet IP Scanner field size Max input 2K words Max output 2K words 1 0 packet size max EtherNet IP 512 bytes Modbus TCP 256 bytes a5 lt l gt 3 Navigate the Ethernet Module window using the following features 1 Module status icons These three indicators display the module s status in online mode 2 Channel area Select a node to display parameters for either e the
220. gure the connection between the communication module and the remote device 1A34009 10 2014 133 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring EtherNet IP Connections Overview An EtherNet IP connection provides a communication link between two or more devices Properties for a single connection can be configured in the DTMs for the connected devices Use the Device Editor to view and edit connection settings The following example presents settings for a connection between the BMX NOC 0401 communication module and a remote STB NIC 2212 network interface module Configuration edits are made to the DTMs for each device When making DTM edits disconnect the selected DTM from the actual module or device see page 46 NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Configuring Connection Settings in the Communication Module DTM Unity Pro automatically creates a connection between a communication module and remote device when the remote device is added to the Unity Pro project Thereafter many edits to the connection can be made in the DTM for the remote device However some of the connection parameters can also be configured in the DTM for the communication module as demonstrated below The following connection settings for this sample configuration can be set in the DTM for the communication module Use settings that are appropriate for
221. he Device Editor navigate to and select the Items node for the STB NIC 2212 network interface module Channel Properties Services EtherNet IP Local Slaves Device List 003 NIC2212_01 lt EIP 192 168 1 6 gt Read Input Write Output Data 4 m Logging The Items window opens Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection ItemName Default Item Name Root BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties SCAND DFA WN gt S SeOANONF OND F Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply Select the Input bit tab to display that page In the Input bit page type the following default root name representing device status into the Default Items Name Root input box type DDI3232_in_data 146 S1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action In the Items List select the first 2 rows in the table These rows represent bits 0 1 in byte Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Position in Byte ItemName Default Item Name Root gt 0 e o 1 DD13232_in_data Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties e o 0000 OO f oN o naung O 0 0 0 0 0 O 4 wd Select a zone and click on the Define It
222. he T gt O target to originator and O gt T originator to target requested packet interval RPI for explicit message connections This value is used to calculate the lifetime of a connection Default 10000 ms EM Request Timeout The amount of time the communication module waits between a request and reply of an explicit message Default 10 s Output Allow reset explicit message The behavior of the communication module as scanner when it receives a reset service request e TRUE indicates the module will accept the request and reset itself e FALSE indicates the module ignores the reset service request and continues uninterrupted operations Default FALSE Behavior when CPU state is STOP The state of the communication module when the CPU application goes into a STOP state e TRUE indicates that the module enters STOP state implicit connections are closed e FALSE indicates that the module enters IDLE state implicit connections are not closed Default FALSE 1A34009 10 2014 71 Configuring Section 2 5 Ethernet Services Overview This section describes how to enable and configure Ethernet services provided by the BMX NOC 0401 communication module What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Enabling Ethernet Services 73 Configuring the DHCP and FDR Servers 75 Configuring the SNMP Agent 81 Con
223. he management parameters NOTE It is recommended that communication function reports be tested at the end of their execution and before the next activation On cold start up confirm that all communication function management parameters are checked and reset to 0 NOTE It may be helpful to use the S21 to examine the first cycle after a cold or warm start For more information refer to Unity Pro online help for S21 Communication Report This report is common to every explicit messaging function It is significant when the value of the activity bit switches from 1 to 0 The reports with a value between 16 01 and 16 FE concern errors detected by the processor that executed the function The different values of this report are indicated in the following table Value Communication report least significant byte 16 00 Correct exchange 16 01 Exchange stop on timeout 16 02 Exchange stop on user request CANCEL 16 03 Incorrect address format 16 04 Incorrect destination address 16 05 Incorrect management parameter format 16 06 Incorrect specific parameters 16 07 Error detected in sending to the destination 16 08 Reserved 16 09 Insufficient receive buffer size 16 0A Insufficient send buffer size 16 0B No system resources the number of simultaneous communication EFs exceeds the maximum that can be managed by the processor 16 0C Incorre
224. herNet IP Received The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has received since the last reset in packets second Modbus TCP Requests The number of Modbus TCP requests the module has sent since the last reset in packets second Modbus TCP Responses The number of Modbus TCP responses the module has received since the last reset in packets second I O Adapter EtherNet IP Sent The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has sent in the role of a local slave since the last reset in packets second EtherNet IP Received The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has received in the role of a local slave since the last reset in packets second I O Module Module Capacity The maximum number of packets that the module can process in packets per second Module Utilization The percentage of communication module capacity being used by the application Messaging Client EtherNet IP Activity The number of I O messages sent by the module using the EtherNet IP protocol since last reset in packets per second 1A34009 10 2014 315 Diagnostics Parameter Description Modbus TCP Activity The number of I O messages sent by the module using the Modbus TCP protocol since last reset in packets per second Messaging Server EtherNet IP Activity The number of I O messages received by the module using th
225. ialized Ports 3 and 4 RSTP Statistics Status The port s current state as defined by RSTP Protocol This state controls the action the port takes when it receives a frame Possible values are disabled discarding learning forwarding Role The port s current role per RSTP protocol Possible values are root port designated port alternate port backup port disabled port 1A34009 10 2014 323 Diagnostics Parameter Description Cost The logical cost of this port as a path to the root switch If this port is configured for AUTO then the cost is determined based on the connection speed of the port STP Packets A value in this field indicates that a device on the network has the STP protocol enabled NOTE e Other devices with STP enabled can severely affect the network convergence times Schneider Electric recommends the STP protocol but not the RSTP protocol be disabled on every network device capable of supporting it The communication module does not support the STP protocol The module s embedded switch ignores ignore STP packets 324 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Local Slave Connection Diagnostics Introduction The Local Slave Diagnostic page and the EIP Connection Diagnostic page present common information Use the e Local Slave Diagnostic page to display I O status and production consumption information for a selected local slave
226. ic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect The Diagnostic window looks like this Fj T iojxi E2 Schneider f ap Electric NOC01 Local Slave 1 H Q 003 NIC2212_01 lt EIP 192 168 1 6 gt Read Input Write Output Data 004 NIP2212_01 lt MDB 192 168 1 7 gt Request 1 Logging Help Ethernet Diagnostic Bandwidth Diagnostic J Refresh Every 500ms Group Parameters Description General Interface Speed Interface Flags Duplex mode Negotiation Status Manual Settings Require Reset Local Hardware Fault Physical Address Input Octets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Discards Errors Unknown Protocols Output Octets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Connected Q Device S1A34009 10 2014 309 Diagnostics To open the Diagnostic window Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic Diagnostic LED Icons During the time that a communication module DTM is connected to the physical communication module Unity Pro sends an explicit message request once per second to detect the state of the communication module and the states of the remote devices and EtherNet IP connections linked
227. ication module was last reset Consumption Byte Total of consumed messages in bytes since the communication module wa last reset Theoretical Packets per second Packets per second calculated sing current configuration value Real Packets per second Actual number of packets per second generated by this connection Diagnostic Production Connection ID The connection ID Consumption Connection ID The connection ID O gt T API Accepted packet interval API of the output connection T gt O API Accepted packet interval API of the input connection O gt T RPI Requested packet interval RPI of the output connection T gt O RPI Requested packet interval RPI of the input connection Socket Diagnostics Socket ID Internal Identification of the socket Remote IP Address IP address of the remote station for this connection Remote Port Port number of the remote station for this connection Local IP Address IP address of the communication module for this connection Local Port Port number of the communication module for this connection S1A34009 10 2014 327 Diagnostics Connection Status Codes The Input and Output Status diagnostic parameters see page 327 in the preceding table can present the following values Input Output Status dec Description 0 OK 33 Time out 53 IDLE 5
228. ice which can be e The connection point on its parent gateway network e The slot number in the modular device parent internal bus Example the device IP address device name The default name is determined by the vendor in the device DTM but can be edited by the user 40 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Node Status The DTM Browser displays the status of each DTM node in the connectivity tree as follows Status Description Built Not built A blue check mark superimposed on a device icon indicates that node or one of its sub nodes is not built This means that some property of the node has changed and the information stored in the physical device is no longer consistent with the local project Connected A connected DTM is denoted in bold text An unconnected DTM appears in plain text Disconnected NOTE e Connecting a DTM to its physical device automatically connects higher level parent nodes up to the root node e Disconnecting a DTM from its physical device automatically disconnects its lower level child nodes NOTE Connecting or disconnecting a DTM to or from its device does not also connect or disconnect Unity Pro to or from the PLC DTMs can be connected disconnected while Unity Pro is either offline or online Installed Not X installed A red superimposed on a device icon indicates the DTM for that device is not installed on the PC Handling Invalid Nodes A
229. in connections controlled by this connections manager 09 09 Connection Entry STRUCT X 0 Unsupported optional item List 0B 11 CPU_Utilization UINT x 0 Unsupported optional item oc 12 MaxBuffSize UDINT x 0 Unsupported optional item oD 13 BufSize Remaining UDINT X 0 Unsupported optional item X supported not supported Services The Connection Manager object performs the following services on the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_Alll x x Returns the value of all attributes 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x x Returns the value of the specified attribute X supported not supported 234 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Modbus Object Overview The Modbus object converts EtherNet IP service requests to Modbus functions and Modbus exception codes to CIP General Status codes It presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 44 hex 68 decimal Instance IDs The Modbus object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes The Modbus object consists of the following attributes Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET
230. in the Services page and the configuration settings are input in the Network Time Service Configuration page of the module DTM The NTP Diagnostics web page looks like t his Diagnostics Mainte e Monitoring NETWORK TIME SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Status Operational Date 21 Oct 2011 Time 14 22 13 DST Status ON Time Zone UTC 5 00 Status Iy IP Address OZ A68 A1 Type Primary Number of Requests 0 Number of Errors 0 Number of Responses le Last Error 16 0 Reset Counters Copyright 1998 2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Click the Reset Counter button to reset to 0 the Network Time Service Statistics To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet NTP Diagnostics If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 1A34009 10 2014 385 Embedded Web Pages Network Time Service Diagnostic Parameters Time synchronization service parameters are in the table Parameter Description Network Time Service Status Operational status of the service in the module e Operational e Service Disabled Date and Time Status Date System date
231. index specification that allows it to be treated as an array variable Indexed addressing can be used with a Mi MWi MDi or MFi address by appending j to the address of the beginning of the array where j is an unsigned integer value For example the third value of an array of float values starting at MF201 would be specified as MF201 2 Data type Contains the data type of the symbol variable or direct address Symbol variable data types appear automatically when the symbol variable is located Select direct address data types from a drop down list The following data types are valid INT 16 bit signed integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer DINT 32 bit signed integer UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit IEEE floating point TIME 32 bit unsigned integer in ms DATE Date 32 bit BCD TOD Time of day 32 bit BCD BOOL 1 bit discrete Boolean Value When animation has started this field displays the value of the symbol variable or direct address This field is updated continuously 1A34009 10 2014 359 Embedded Web Pages Field Description Format Contains the format type for displaying the value of the symbol variable or direct address The following formats are available bool Boolean dec Decimal hex Hexadecimal binary Binary ASCII bytes displayed as
232. ing Email via the SEND_EMAIL Block Using SEND_EMAIL to Send Pre configured Email Messages Use the SEND_EMATL block in your application to programmatically send any of three email messages you previously configured in Unity Pro see page 92 NOTE To successfully send an Email message using the SEND _EMATL block synchronize the Email client service and PLC application i e activate the Email client service whenever the PLC is in RUN mode FBD Representation SEND_EMAIL Address ADR Header Key of Email to Send j HEAD_KEY Email Dynamic Subject Sting SUBJ_STR Email Body String BoDY_STR Management_Param GEST W Management_Param Input Parameters The following table describes the input parameters Parameters Data Type Description ADR ARRAY 0 7 OF INT The path to the destination device in the format of rack slot channel Use the EFB ADDR to convert from the string format to the array of INT For example if the module is configured at rack 0 slot 4 channel 0 use ADDR 0 4 0 HEAD _KEY INT The email header number previously configured in Unity Pro see page 92 Only values of 1 2 and 3 are valid SUBJ_STR STRING The dynamic part of the email subject that is appended to the static subject string BODY_STR STRING The body of the email NOTE Use the N or n two character tag to insert a line break in the email te
233. ing commands The server or slave has accepted the request and is processing it but a long duration of time will be required to do so This response is returned so that a timeout in the client or master will not occur The client or master can next send a Poll Program Complete message to determine if processing is completed 0x8106 33030 Slave Device Busy Specialized use in conjunction with programming commands The server or slave is engaged in processing a long duration program command The client or master should retransmit the message later when the server or slave is free 0x8107 33031 Negative Acknowledge Specialized use in conjunction with programming commands The request attempts to initiate a program function that is not supported by the server slave 1A34009 10 2014 403 Modbus Exception Response Codes Status Response Description Hex Dec 0x8108 33032 Memory Parity Specialized use in conjunction with function codes 20 and 21 and Error reference type 6 indicating that the extended file area did not pass a consistency check 0x810A 33034 Gateway Path Specialized use in conjunction with gateways indicates that the Unavailable gateway was unable to allocate an internal communication path from the input port to the output port for processing the request Usually means that the gateway is misconfigured or overloaded 0x810B 33035 Gateway
234. ion between two successfully transmitted packets was detected on the link Excessive collisions The number of times the transmitter has not been successful after 16 attempts to transmit a frame due to repeated collisions CRC errors The number of times a CRC FCS error was detected on an incoming frame Number Bytes Received Number of inbound bytes received on the interface Number Inbound Packets Error The number of inbound packets that contain detected errors not included in discards Number Inbound Packets Discard The number of inbound packets received on the interface but discarded Number Bytes Sent The number of outbound bytes transmitted on the interface Number Outbound Packets Error The number of outbound packets that contain detected errors not included in discards Number Outbound Packets Discard The number of outbound packets discarded while attempting to send them 1A34009 10 2014 381 Embedded Web Pages Redundancy Introduction Use the Redundancy page to enable and disable the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP for switch ports 3 and 4 NOTE Because only switch ports 3 and 4 support RSTP redundancy use ports 3 and 4 to connect the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module to the wider network and ports 1 and 2 for connections to local devices The RSTP service creates a loop free logical network path for Ethernet devices that are pa
235. ique number or identifier assigned to the device By default Unity Pro assigns e 000 local slave 1 e 001 local slave 2 e 002 local slave 3 In this example accept the default 000 1A34009 10 2014 105 Configuring Setting Description Active Configuration e Enabled activates the local slave e Disabled de activates the local slave but retains the current local slave settings In this example select Enabled Comment An optional free text comment field up to 80 characters maximum In this example leave blank Connection bit Auto generated integer 0 127 indicating the offset of the connection s health bit located in the module s input area control bit located in the module s output area Note This setting is auto generated after the local slave settings are input and the network configuration is saved Configuring the Size of Local Slave Input and Output Assemblies Use the Assemblies section of the Local Slave page to configure the size of the local slave inputs and outputs The assembly numbers are non editable and are assigned by Unity Pro as follows Assembly number Localslave number Used for connection 101 1 T gt 0 1 102 1 O gt T Exclusive Owner 103 1 Configuration 199 1 O gt T Listen Only 111 2 T gt O 112 2 O gt T Exclusive Owner 113 2 Configuration 200 2 O gt T Listen On
236. iring NOTE Unity Pro software running in the PC is used to configure the BMX P34 20302 controller In this example the PC is indirectly wired to the CPU s Ethernet port via the Ethernet switch Alternatively you could bypass the switch and directly wire the PC to either the CPU s Modbus or USB ports 126 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Adding an STB NIC 2212 Remote Device Overview You can use the Unity Pro device library to add a remote device in this example the STB NIC 2212 module to your project Only a remote device that is part of your Unity Pro device library can be added to your project Refer to the topic describing the Add EDS File Wizard see page 118 for instructions on how to add a device EDS file to the device library Alternatively with a remote device already added to your device library you can use automatic device discovery to populate your project Perform automatic device discovery by using the Field bus discovery command with a communication module selected in the DTM Browser In either case you need to update the list of available modules and devices as follows Step Action 1 In the Unity Pro main menu select Tools Hardware Catalog to display that window 2 In the Hardware Catalog window click on the DTM Catalog tab to open that page 2 In the DTM Catalog page click Reload catalog The list of available devices as displayed both in the DTM Catalog
237. items e 1 output word item NOTE The items created below are designed to hold data received from or sent to the third party scanner In addition to these items it is necessary to include logic in the application programs in which the Ethernet communication module and the third party scanner respectively are included Writing this code is beyond the scope of this example 1A34009 10 2014 109 Configuring Creating Input Word Items To create input items for local slave 01 Step Action 1 Select the Input tab to open that page Input Input bit Output Output bit Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name a Default Item Name Root m BLOCKA Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 t 8 9 0 fa Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply NOTE In this example each row represents a byte Because the items you create will be a 16 bit words each item consists of 2 rows In the Default Item Name Root input box type ProductionTotal_LineA Starting at the beginning of the table select the first two rows 0 and 1 input Input bit Output Output bit Default Item Name Root c ProductionTotal_LineA Define Item s Delete Item s y Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Show Properties il KN SOANDNAR WN
238. k s Management parameter which is common to both Modbus TCP and EtherNet IP explicit messaging What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Configuring Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 271 Configuring the DATA_EXCH Management Parameter 273 270 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH Overview Use the DATA EXCH function block to configure both Modbus TCP explicit messages and connected and unconnected EtherNet IP explicit messages The Management_ Param the Data_to Send and the Received _ Data parameters define the operation EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters FBD Representation DATA_EXCH_Instance DATA_EXCH ENO Address RECP Received_Data ActionType Data_to_Send Management_Param Management_Param Input Parameters Parameter Data type Description Address Array 0 7 of INT The path to the destination device the content of which can vary depending on the message protocol Use the ADDM function Refer to a description of the Address parameter for e EtherNet IP messages see page 277 e Modbus TCP messages see page 293 ActionType INT The type of action to perform For both the EtherNet IP and Modbus TCP protocols this setting 1 transmission followed by await reception Data_to_Send Array n m of INT The content of this parameter is specifi
239. k viewer 371 redundancy 382 RSTP 322 scanner status 375 status summary 368 diagnostics web page 367 1A34009 10 2014 409 Index download 56 DSCP 62 DTM add 117 DTM Browser 40 DTM browser advanced mode 47 configuring properties in device editor 54 DTM browser menu commands 42 E EDS file add 118 remove 122 Email configuring 92 diagnostics 317 383 Ethernet connection speed 67 Ethernet diagnostics 311 ethernet link object 247 EtherNet IP explicit connection diagnostics object 255 257 EtherNet IP interface diagnostics object 246 EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics object 249 EtherNet IP settings 70 explicit message 209 EtherNet IP 300 Get_Attribute_Single 279 Modbus TCP 302 Read Modbus Object 283 read register 295 Write Modbus Object 287 explicit messaging 277 communication report 395 error codes 392 Modbus TCP function codes 292 operation report 395 F FDR 75 field bus discovery 48 full duplex 200 H hardware catalog updating 120 health bits 187 home web page 348 I O connection 329 local slave 329 identity object 229 IGMP snooping 202 implicit message 210 inputs address 186 10 connection diagnostics object 251 IP address 65 L LEDs 306 load example 222 limits 275 local slave 102 configuring 104 diagnostics 325 1 0 109 329 logging 331 menu commands DTM browser 42 message priority 274 message bandwidth
240. l Device Information DTM Information Protocol Information DTM name management Alias name NIC2212_01 Tag name Default I O vision management Default input I O vision Variable name NIC2212_01_IN Default output I O vision Variable name NIC2212_01_OUT When you edit the Alias name Unity Pro applies it as the base for both structure and variable names NOTE No additional editing needs to be performed in the pages of this window Except for the Alias name field parameters are read only 5 Click OK Unity Pro adds the new STB NIC 2212 network interface module to the DTM Browser beneath the communication module 6 Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to save your configuration edits The next step is to configure the device you have just added to the project 128 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Configuring STB NIC 2212 Properties Overview Use the pages of the Device Editor to view and edit settings for a remote device Before you can edit the device settings disconnect the DTM from the remote device see page 46 To display the DTM settings for a remote device select the device name which is found under the Device List node in the left pane of the Device Editor For the purposes of this example which configures an STB NIC 2212 network interface module select the node named NIC2212 01 The Device Editor displays
241. late that was either e previously saved or e created after the Data Editor was opened but not yet saved Select a data template in this list to view or edit its contents NOTE If you create a new data template then navigate away from the Data Editor before clicking the Save button the new data template will be lost 358 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Data Template Use the data template when animation is turned ON to monitor the status and values of items for the template that is currently selected in the data template list Each data template item or row is defined in the configuration area A data template item can contain the following fields Field Description Symbol Contains the names of Unity Pro symbols variables Address Contains direct addresses and the addresses of Unity Pro symbols variables Any direct address can be viewed by entering its reference in this field Valid direct addresses include Mi same as for OX coils li same as 1x for discreet inputs IWi same as 3x for input registers MWi MDi MFi same as 4x for holding registers NOTE e A single bit of any word address for example MWi IWi can be specified by appending j to the address where j is a bit index in the range of 0 LSB to 15 MSB For example bit 4 of the value at MW101 would be specified as MW101 4 e A direct address can include an
242. lave or Connection I O Value Diagnostics 329 LOGGING serens esis eee ts re ee oe eee eee 331 1A34009 10 2014 9 3 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 11 1 Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C CPU I O Block Diagnostics Accessing the Unity Pro Diagnostic Tools 000 Communication Channel Diagnostics in Unity Pro Communication Module Diagnostics in Unity Pro 2c ee ee eee ees Replacing the Ethernet Communication Module Replacing the Ethernet Communication Module Embedded Web Pages Accessing the Embedded Web Server Introducing the Embedded Web Pages Accessing the Home Page Using and Editing a Username and Passwords Configuring Port Mirroring Monitoring the Unity Pro Application Using the Monitoring Page Data Editor Standard Working With Data Templates Data Editor Lite Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics Page Status Summary Rack Viewer 6 0 65 000 eee Processor Load Scanner Status Messaging 0e eee eee QoS Configuration Port Statistics 00 Redundancy Email Diagnostics Network Time Service Diagnostics Properties 2 0 5 Detected Error Codes
243. le name For this example ReceivedData Functional module Accept the default lt None gt Comment Optional Type your comment here Number of animated characters Type in 100 representing the size of the data buffer in words 1A34009 10 2014 281 Explicit Messaging Step Action 5 The completed Properties dialog looks like this Name Functional module ReceivedData feNone gt x Comment Extended String Animation Number of animated characters 100 range 20 300 m Click OK to close the dialog 6 In the animation table s Name column type in the name of the variable assigned to the RECP pin ReceivedData and hit Enter The animation table displays the ReceivedData variable 7 Expand the ReceivedData variable to display its word array where you can view the CIP response contained in the ReceivedData variable E Roceiweanata T Modification Force Y F t F s ReceivedData ARRAY 0 49 OF INT S ReceivedData 0 16 008E INT o ReceivedData 1 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 2 16 10A0 ReceivedData 3 16 0000 ReceivedData 4 16 000F ReceivedData 5 16 0000 ReceivedData 6 16 0000 ReceivedData 7 16 0000 ReceivedData 8 16 0000 ReceivedData 9 16 0000 ReceivedData 10 16 000F ReceivedData 11 16 0000 CACAL AE A AE A AE IE
244. ll Rights Reserved 3 On the left side of the page click on the Security node If required input the Username and web page access Password The Security page opens Monitoring Setup SECURITY HTTP access rights Username LO o New password OOo Confirm password o y Save User Data Editor Write Password Data Editor write password New write password i Confirm write password Change Write Password Copyright 2000 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved 350 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Step Description 4 To change the username and password combination used for web page access in the HTTP access rights section of the page enter values for the following fields Username e To change the username type in a new username e To retain the current username for example if you are changing only the password type in the current username New password To change the password type in a new password e To keep the current password for example if you are changing only the username type in the current password Confirm Type in the same password entered in the New password field password above Click the Save User button To change the password used for writing data values in the Data Editor in the Data Editor Write Password section of the page enter values for the following fields Data Editor write Type
245. looks like this Configuration Static 7 Group Parameter Value IP Address gt Scanner IP Address 192 168 1 4 gt Sub Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Description IP address of a machine likely to perform routing to another network internal or external OK Cancel Apply To display this page select the Channel Properties TCP IP node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Properties The IP addressing properties you can configure in this page depends upon the selected configuration mode Property Description Configuration Mode Options Scanner IP The 32 bit identifier consisting of both a network Static Address address and a host address assigned to a device e Flash memory connected to a TCP IP Internet network using the Internet e BOOTP Protocol IP e DHCP Sub Network The 32 bit value used to hide or mask the network portion Static Mask of the IP address and thereby reveal the host address of a device on a network using the IP protocol 1A34009 10 2014 65 Configuring NOTE The default device name based on the rotary switch settings is BMX_0401_xxy where e xx is the value of the upper switch setting tens e y is the value of the lower switch setting ones Property
246. ly 121 3 T gt O 122 3 O gt T Exclusive Owner 123 3 Configuration 201 3 O gt T Listen Only 1 In this table e O indicates the originator or scanner device e T indicates the target or adapter device 106 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring The Local Slave assembly settings include Setting Description Outputs T gt O A read only value see table above In this example 101 Outputs T gt O Size The maximum size in bytes reserved for local slave outputs An integer from 1 to 509 In this example only two output bytes are used type in 2 Inputs O gt T A read only value see table above In this example 102 Inputs O gt T Size The maximum size in bytes reserved for local slave inputs An integer from 0 to 505 In this example only eight input bytes are used type in 8 Configuration A read only value see table above In this example 103 Configuration Size A read only value set to 0 NOTE When using explicit messaging to read the Ethernet communication module s assembly object you need to allocate sufficient room for the response because the size of the response will equal the sum of NOTE the assembly size Reply service 1 byte General Status 1 byte Configuring Local Slave I O Variable Names Each input and output that Unity Pro creates for your application has both a non editable structure name used by U
247. m rotary switches If conflict start basic services only If no conflict start services configured in the application Start basic services only device name from application Start services configured in the application 1 Based on device name BMX_0401_xxy where x the top rotary switch and y represents the bottom rotary switch 68 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Basic Services The following services are provided by the module when it is using its default IP address FTP server used for firmware download HTTP Web server Modbus TCP server EtherNet IP explicit message server SNMP agent RSTP NOTE Using the module as a messaging server when the module is using its default IP address is not recommended The module will replace the default IP address with a served or user configured IP address as soon as one is received 1A34009 10 2014 69 Configuring Channel Properties EtherNet IP Page Description The EtherNet IP page is displayed only when Unity Pro is operating in Advanced Mode Use the EtherNet IP page to configure the following communication module properties e properties that determine how the communication module as a scanner opens connections for both implicit and explicit messages e the frequency for transmitting produced data over implicit messaging connections e the timeout period for explicit messaging connections e the behavior of the communicati
248. mata a n aA E Modification Force MOF LF s H Ei aon a o a e ReceivedData ARRAY 0 49J OF INT ReceivedData 0 16 00D0 INT ReceivedData 1 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 2 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 3 16 0001 INT ReceivedData 4 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 5 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 6 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 7 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 8 16 0000 INT OCC CCC CCE ReceivedData 9 _ 16 0000 INT _ ReceivedData 10 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 11 16 0000 INT ReceivedData 12 16 0000 INT Note Each array entry presents 2 bytes of data in little endian format where the least significant byte is stored in the smallest memory address For example DO in word 0 is the lower byte and 00 is the upper byte 290 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Section 8 3 Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH Overview This section shows you how to configure DATA_EXCH function block parameters for Modbus TCP explicit messages What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Function Codes 292 Configuring Modbus TCP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 293 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Register Request 295 1A34009 10 2014 291
249. mber of devices 128 devices 125 devices as scanner 3 devices as adapter shared with Modbus TCP Maximum message size 512 bytes Adapter Maximum number of instances 3 adapter instances Maximum number of connections 2 connections per instance Maximum message size 511 bytes including header Inputs 505 bytes excluding header Outputs 509 bytes excluding header Modbus TCP Modbus Scanner Maximum number of registers Read 125 registers Write 120 registers Maximum number of devices 128 devices shared with EtherNet IP Maximum message size Read 250 bytes 125 words excluding header Write 240 bytes 120 words excluding header 1A34009 10 2014 19 Installation Explicit Messaging Specifications The Ethernet communication module presents the following explicit messaging features Communication type Feature Capacity EtherNet IP CIP Explicit Messaging Client Maximum number of simultaneous connections 16 connections Maximum number of concurrent requests 16 requests shared with Modbus TCP Server Maximum number of simultaneous connections 32 connections Maximum messaging size 1023 bytes Modbus TCP Modbus Scanner Client Maximum number of simultaneous connections 16 connections Maximum number of concurrent requests 16 requests shar
250. me in this case NOC01 e the device number in this case 01 e the suffix OUT In this case the default would be NOC01_01_OUT For this example accept the default variable name If you have edited one or more variable names you can restore the default variable names by clicking on the Default Name button 108 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Local Slave Inputs and Outputs Introduction The Ethernet communication module serves as an adapter when the Active Configuration field is set to Enabled in the configuration window for one or more of the module s local slave nodes When a local slave instance of an Ethernet communication module is enabled the designated memory location allocated to that instance is exposed to and can be accessed by other devices The I O data exchange between the remote device and the local slave is configured as part of the remote device s configuration settings Configuring the I O Items You can configure input and output items in groups of 1 or more single bits 8 bit bytes 16 bit words 32 bit dwords or 32 bit IEEE floating values The number of items you create depends upon the data type and size of each item The process for creating and defining I O items for the local slave is the same as for any adapter class device and depends upon the type of items you wish to create In support of the ongoing configuration example the following items are required e 4 input word
251. meout period the client reissues its request The length of the response timeout will vary depending on the requirements of your application Examples of explicit messages include SNMP messages FTP messages CIP establish connection messages EtherNet IP query and response messages and DHCP messages The characteristics of explicit messaging are point to point client server mode variable size variable frequency long response time long connection timeout Explicit messages can be sent as either connected or unconnected depending on the frequency of your need for data and on the level of service required Message type Characteristics Connected Begins when an originating device initiates a connection by sending a request to a target device e The connection is established when the originator receives a successful response from the target e ACIP connected message has a higher priority and provides better service but requires a greater amount of resources from both the target and originator devices e Used for recurring requests and for high priority parameter monitoring e Typically use short response timeout settings 1A34009 10 2014 209 Optimizing Performance Message type Characteristics Unconnected e Less resource intensive e Used for less frequent requests and for lower priority parameter monitoring e Typically use very long response timeout settings NOTE
252. module s RSTP service Use the Refresh Every 500ms checkbox to display static or dynamic data as follows When the checkbox is This page Selected e Displays data that is dynamically updated every 500 ms and Increments the number at the top of the table each time data is refreshed De selected e Displays static data and Does not Increment the number at the top of the table which instead displays a constant value NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect The RSTP Diagnostic page looks like this Ethernet Diagnostic l Bandwidth Diagnostic RSTP Diagnostic Refresh Every 500ms 55 Group Parameter Bridge RSTP Diagnostic Bridge ID 0 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Designated Root ID 0 Root Path Cost 0 Default Hello Time Learned Hello Time Configured Max Age Learned Max Age Total Topology Changes Port 3 RSTP Statistics Status Disabled Role Unknown 0 Cost 0 STP Packets 0 Port 3 RSTP Statistics Status Disabled Role Unknown 0 Cost 0 m Description 322 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic In the left
253. mote device in this case an STB NIC 2212 network interface module at IP address 192 168 1 6 using the Write_Holding_ Registers service of the Modbus Object You can perform the same explicit messaging service using the EtherNet IP Explicit Message window of the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool see page 300 Implementing the DATA_EXCH Function Block To implement the DATA EXCH function block you need to create and assign variables for the following blocks ManagParam 0 0 ReqSize ManagParam 3 DATA_EXCH 2 ManagParam 0 0 0 and ManagParam 3 ReqSize EN ENO ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP ADR RECP ReceivedData ActionType TYP DataToSend EMIS ManagParam GEST GEST ManagParam 1A34009 10 2014 287 Explicit Messaging Declaring Variables In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging configurations zox Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter 0 S Name F V EDT DDT IODDT Name Type X Value Comment z ActionType INT 16 01 Transmission followed by await reception 5 0 DataToSend ARRAY O 5OFINT o T H DataToSend 0 INT __16 0250 HiByte 02 Path Size LowByte 50 Service Code Write Holding Reg _ DataToSend 1 INT 16 4420 HiByte 44 Class LowByte 20 Class Segment Data
254. mple 2 Read Device read only The service the explicit message is intended to Id Code perform In this example Basic Device Identity Not used in this example Object Id read only Specify the object the explicit message is intended to access In this example 0 Not used in this example Refer to your Modbus TCP device user manual for Start Address Quantity Read Device Id Code and Object Id values Unit Id The number of the device or module that is the target of the connection A value of 255 the default used to access the Ethernet communication module itself 0 254 identifies the device number of the target device behind a Modbus TCP to Modbus gateway Number read only The integer associated with the service to be performed by the explicit message An integer from 0 255 Name Select the service the explicit message is intended to perform In this example ReadHoldingRegisters Repeat 500ms Select this check box to re send the explicit message every 500 ms Leave this check box de selected After your explicit message is configured click Send to Device The Response area displays any data sent to the configuration tool by the target device in hexadecimal format The Status area displays messages indicating whether or not the explicit message has succeeded Click Close to close the window 1A34009 10 2014 303 Explicit Messaging 304 1A34009 10 2014
255. n Configuration Error detected state the double word MDr m c 4 contains the default IP address of the module When a duplicate IP address is detected the double word MDr m c 4 contains the served or configured duplicate IP address When the module is waiting for a BOOTP response the double word MDr m c 4 contains the IP address 0 0 0 0 1A34009 10 2014 341 Diagnostics 342 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 10 Replacing the Ethernet Communication Module Replacing the Ethernet Communication Module Overview Replacing The module involves removing the old module and mounting a new one in its place When to Replace You can replace the communication module at any time using another module with compatible firmware A module can be replaced when power to the module is either e off cold swap or e on hot swap The replacement module obtains its operating parameters over the backplane connection from the CPU The transfer occurs either immediately hot swap or when power is next cycled to the device cold swap NOTE Operating parameters that were added to the configuration using explicit messaging SET commands are not included in the parameters that the CPU sends to a replacement module To install the replacement module follow the instructions in the module mounting procedure see page 21 S1A34009 10 2014 343 Replacing the Communication Module 344 1A340
256. n add to your Unity Pro application Refer to the topic Updating the Unity Pro Hardware Catalog see page 120 for step by step instructions 24 1A34009 10 2014 Installation Uninstalling the Ethernet Configuration Tool Introduction Use the Add or Remove Programs utility provided by the Windows operating system to uninstall the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool To completely uninstall the Ethernet Configuration Tool remove each of the following three DTMs one at a time Generic EtherNet IP DTM Generic Modbus TCP DTM Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Un Installing Ethernet Configuration Tool DTMs To remove the three Ethernet Configuration Tool DTMs Step Action 1 Open the Windows Control Panel Start Settings Control Panel In the Control Panel double click on Add or Remove Programs In the Add or Remove Programs window select the Change or Remove Programs page 4 Select the first of the three DTMs to remove for example the Generic EtherNet IP DTM then click Remove 5 Repeat step 4 for each of the remaining 2 DTMs Generic Modbus DTM and Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool 1A34009 10 2014 25 Installation 26 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 2 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Module Overview This chapter shows you how to use Unity Pro programming software to select and configure the Ethernet communication module NOTE The
257. n bytes 2 ReceivedData ARRAY 0 1 OF INT ie ReqSize INT 6 E gt Configuring the Address Variable The Address variable identifies the explicit message originating device in this example the communication module and the target device Note that the Address variable does not include the Xway address elements Network Station because we are not bridging through another PLC station Use the ADDM function to convert the following character string to an address ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 7 TCP MBS where rack 0 module slot number 1 channel 0 remote device IP address 192 168 1 7 message type TCP protocol Modbus Configuring the ActionType Variable The ActionType variable identifies the function type for the DATA EXCH function block Variable Description Value hex ActionType Transmission followed by wait for response 16 01 296 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring the DataToSend Variable The DataToSend variable contains the target register address and the number of registers to read Variable Description Value hex DataToSend 0 e High byte Most significant byte MSB of register 16 1503 address 16 15 21 decimal e Low byte function code 16 03 03 decimal DataToSend 1 High byte Most significant byte MSB of the number of 16 000F registers to read 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte Least significant byte LSB of register
258. n or off as described below is the preferred way of regulating communication with a remote device Toggling a connection control bit on and off does not affect the address location of I O items In either case on or off the I O items remain a part of the configuration at the same address locations NOTE By contrast enabling and disabling the Active Configuration property for a device or local slave either adds I O items to or removes I O items from the application This has the rippling effect of changing the addresses not only for the items of the enabled disabled device but also for I O items relating to other devices in the configuration The following example shows you how to add connection control bits to the Connection_Health_Bits animation table that you created above and use the animation table s Modification function to toggle control bits on or off Step Action 1 With the Connection_Health_Bits animation table open double click on the next empty row in the Name column then click the ellipsis button 3 The Instance Selection dialog opens 2 In the Instance Selection dialog navigate to and select the entire CONTROL BITS OUT array Animation Table Instance Selection le x NOC01_OUT CONTROL_BITS_OUT Variables Function Blocks T Name fF EDT DDT V IODDT _NIC2212_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_IN E NIC2212_01_OUT T_NIC2212_01_OUT NIP2212_01_IN kaza IN F NIP2212_01_OUT T_N
259. nal status of the service in the module green operational e orange not operational Network Time Server Status Communication status of the NTP server green the NTP server is reachable red the NTP server is not reachable Last Update Elapsed time in seconds since the most recent NTP server update Current Date System date Current Time System time in hh mm ss format DST Status The actual working status of the automatic daylight savings service e ON automatic adjustment of daylight savings is enabled and the current date and time reflect the daylight savings time adjustment e OFF automatic adjustment of daylight savings is disabled or automatic adjustment of daylight savings is enabled but the current date and time may not reflect the daylight savings time adjustment Quality The correction in seconds applied to the local counter at every NTP server update Numbers greater than 0 indicate increasingly excessive traffic condition or NTP server overload Requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server Responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server Errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests 320 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Parameter Description Last Error Last detected error code received from the NTP client e 0 good NTP configuration 1 late NTP server response can
260. nction type for the DATA EXCH function block Variable Description Value hex ActionType Transmission followed by wait for response 16 01 288 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring the DataToSend Variable The DataToSend variable identifies the type of explicit message and the CIP request Variable Description Value hex DataToSend 0 CIP request service information e High byte request size in words 16 02 2 decimal e Low byte service code 16 50 80 decimal 16 0250 DataToSend 1 CIP request class information e High byte class 16 44 68 decimal e Low byte class segment 16 20 32 decimal 16 4420 DataToSend 2 CIP request instance information e High byte instance 16 01 1 decimal e Low byte instance segment 16 24 36 decimal 16 0124 DataToSend 3 Location of first word to write MW1 e High byte 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte 16 00 0 decimal 16 0000 DataToSend 4 Number of words to write e High byte attribute 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte attribute segment 16 01 1 decimal 16 0001 DataToSend 5 Data to write e High byte attribute 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte attribute segment 16 6F 111 decimal 16 006F Viewing the Response Use a Unity Pro Animation table to display the ReceivedData variable array Note that the ReceivedData variable array consists of the e
261. nfiguration Ping Group Parameter aQ Identity Object Vendor ID 2 Device Type 2 Product Code A Revision Serial Number f Product Name a Status Owned Configured Extended Device Status Major Unrecoverable Fault Major Recoverable Fault 2 Minor Unrecoverable Fault 2 Minor Recoverable Fault Description Refresh Object Identity C Connection Manager C TCP IP C Ethernet Link Instance 1 z QoS Reset Device 260 S1A34009 10 2014 Online Action Retrieve and Display CIP Object Data To display CIP object data for an EtherNet IP communication module or remote device Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select a communication module 2 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt Online Action The Online Action window opens In the left pane of the Online Action window select a communication module or EtherNet IP device In the right pane click on the Module Information tab to open that page If Unity Pro is operating in Advanced Mode Select one of the following CIP objects e Identity e Connection Manager e TCP IP e Ethernet Link e Qos If you selected a multi port module or device in step 3 above select an Interface or port number NOTE If Unity Pro is operating in Standard Mode it will display data only for the CIP Identity object Click the Refresh
262. nfiguring the Size and Location of Inputs and Outputs Overview Use the Configuration page of the Ethernet communication module s Properties window to configure e the size and starting position of inputs e the size and starting position of outputs The following steps present one example of how to configure the size and location of inputs and outputs Your own project configuration may differ Setting Input and Output Memory Addresses and Naming the Module The Properties window opens when you double click the left mouse button on the image of the BMX NOC 0401 communication module in either the Local Bus window or the Project Browser When you select the Configuration page it displays the network or Alias name This is the name assigned to the network channel when the communication module was added to the project 36 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Use the Configuration page to edit the communication module inputs and outputs as follows jo MKNOC Oot ea Ethernet 4 Port 10 100 RJ45 a Configuration Project Network name M_NOC0401 Inputs Outputs MW Index 0 MW Index Max size 16 Max size EIP connectivity network Update application To input the above settings take the following steps Step Action 1 In the module s Properties window select the Configuration page 2 Type in the size and starting position of the inputs and outputs as follows In the Inputs
263. ng the time zone location of the module e enabling the automatic adjustment of the module internal time setting for daylight saving time changes The Ethernet communication module sends its internal time setting to the PLC controller over the shared backplane The PLC manages an internal clock to maintain this time and uses the time setting to time stamp system events and O data NOTE The network time service is available only when you first perform the following tasks e upgrade the firmware in the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module to version 2 01 or higher e select the BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet communication module for your project using Unity Pro version 7 0 or higher Operation of the network time service can be monitored and diagnosed in e the Network Time Service Diagnostics page of the Unity Pro software see page 319 and e the Network Time Service web page see page 385 You can configure the network time only in the following page NTP Server Configuration Primary NTP Server IP Address 192 18 4 1 Secondary NTP Server IP Address 192 s WEB 2 1l 2 Polling Period 18 1 120 seconds Time Zone UTC 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada E Timezone Offset o 1439 to 1439 Minutes Daylight Saving Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving Disabled w Start Daylight Saving Month March Day of Week Sunday Week 1 End Daylight Saving Month November Day of Week Sunday Week 1
264. nitoring Page Monitoring Page Click on the main menu Monitoring command to display the Monitoring page Schneider f1 AENA 0h Electric Fane Documentation Monitoring SR SS Maintenance 4 Monitoring B Data Editor Lite Standard Copyright 1998 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved To access a monitoring service click on either of the following links e Data Editor Lite e Data Editor Standard S1A34009 10 2014 355 Embedded Web Pages Data Editor Standard Overview The Data Editor is a Java applet that dynamically displays run time application data Use the Data Editor to create and edit data monitoring tables that provide read write access to application data and device registers NOTE Write access is password protected A WARNING Unintended Equipment Operation The data editor makes it possible to write to application variables and change application data values e Use passwords to strictly limit access to write data functionality e Do not use weak passwords including the default password and other obvious passwords e Limit access to trained personnel Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage This topic describes the Data Editor user interface 356 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Data Editor The Data Editor presents the following controls CF a Sle x
265. nity Pro to internally identify input and output items and an editable variable name Use the I O Structure Name section of the Local Slave page to e view and edit local slave input and output variable names e view non editable local slave structure names The following property settings have been made in this example Setting Description Input Structure Name The read only name for input structures By default it is the concatenation of the prefix T_ the alias device name in this case NOCO1 the device number in this case 01 the suffix _IN In this case the default would be T_NOC01_01_IN 1A34009 10 2014 107 Configuring Setting Description Variable Name The editable base name for input variables By default it is the concatenation of the alias device name in this case NOCO01 e the device number in this case 01 the suffix _IN In this case the default would be NOC01_01_IN For this example accept the default variable name Output Structure Name The read only name for output structures By default it is the concatenation of e the prefix T_ the alias device name in this case NOCO1 e the device number in this case 01 e the suffix OUT In this case the default would be T_NOC01_01_OUT Variable Name The editable base name for output variables By default it is the concatenation of the alias device na
266. nnected to PE ground at the Ethernet switch Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The Ethernet communication module communicates over an industrial Ethernet network through any one of four RJ45 connectors located on the front of the module e Use the top two ports ports 1 and 2 to connect to end devices e Use the bottom two ports ports 3 and 4 which support the RSTP redundancy protocol to connect to the local area networks for example a ring 22 1A34009 10 2014 Installation Installing Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Software Overview Accessing Unity Pro Configuration Tool Software depends on the version of Unity Pro that you are using e Unity Pro version 6 0 and higher The module configuration software is already included in the Unity Pro installation e Unity Pro version 5 0 You need to install the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool software which you can obtain from the following website http www global download schneider electric com 8525773E00058BDC all DA00A87B8BB3038685257 7940058D66C Installing Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Software for Unity Pro Version 5 0 To install this software navigate to navigate to the root of the installation files and run the file Setup exe The setup process displays the following setup screens Step Screen Description 1 Welcome Click Next to continue 2 ReadMe and
267. nputs and outputs include e 8 input bytes 4 words are reserved with an instance name of NOCO1_LS1_IN e 4 output bytes 2 words are reserved with an instance name of NOCO1_LS1_OUT e Remote EtherNet IP device inputs and outputs include e 19 input bytes 10 words are reserved with an instance name of NIC2212_01_IN e 8 output bytes 4 words are reserved with an instance name of NIC2212_01_OUT I O Assignment Without an Activated Local Slave When you click the Update application button in the Ethernet communication module Configuration page with the local slave de activated Unity Pro auto generates a collection of variables in support of the application s I O items at the following instance locations CIM mx Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter d T B EDT DDT IODDT NOC01_IN T_NOC01_IN MW1 NIC2212_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_IN MW17 l NOC01_OUT T_NOC01_OUT MW101 NIC2212_01_OUT T_NIC2212_01_OUT MW117_ H Note the address locations of the remote EtherNet IP device s inputs MW17 and outputs MW117 As you will see below when the local slave is activated these address locations will change I O Assignment With an Activated Local Slave The following example displays input and output variables for the same project However in this example the Active Configuration setting for the first local slave was set to Enabled in the local slave
268. ntact the identified device s manufacturer for inquiries regarding the corresponding non Schneider Electric EDS files Adding EDS Files To add one or more EDS files to the library Step Action 1 Ifthe DTM Browser is not already open in the Unity Pro main menu select Tools gt DTM Browser 2 Inthe DTM Browser select a communication module then click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 3 In the pop up menu select Device menu Add EDS to library The introductory page of the wizard opens 4 Click Next Page 2 of the wizard opens EDS Addition x Ea Select the Location of the EDS File s Add File s Add all the EDS from the Directory f Look in Subfolders Directory or File Name The EDS Files usable in EIP CT are registered in the EDS base Select the location of the file s and click on the Next button to insert the EDS files in the base lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 118 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 5 Inthe Select the Location of the EDS File s section select either e Add File s to add one or more EDS files you will individually select or e Add all the EDS from the Directory to add all files from a folder you will select Select Look in Subfolders to also add EDS files in subfolders beneath the folder you selected 6 Click the Browse button The Open dialog opens
269. ntent depends on the design of each device CIP object data and content are exposed and accessed hierarchically in the following nested levels Object Lig Class Class Attributes l isinska Instance Attributes NOTE You can use explicit messaging to access either e a collection of instance attributes by including in the explicit message address only the object s class and instance values or e asingle attribute by extending the explicit message address to include not only the object s class and instance values but also a specific attribute value When the Ethernet communication module s local slave service is activated remote devices can send explicit messages to the module s CIP object structure and e access module data or e execute module commands This chapter describes the CIP objects the Ethernet communication module exposes to remote devices 1A34009 10 2014 227 CIP objects What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Identity Object 229 Assembly Object 231 Connection Manager Object 233 Modbus Object 235 Quality Of Service QoS Object 297 TCP IP Interface Object 239 Ethernet Link Object 241 EtherNet IP Interface Diagnostics Object 246 EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics Object 249 IO Connection Diagnostics Object 251 EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagnostics Object 255 EtherNet IP Explicit Connection Diagn
270. ntire data buffer To display the CIP response follow these steps Step Action 1 In Unity Pro select Tools Project Browser to open the Project Browser 2 In the Project Browser select the Animation Tables folder then click the right mouse button A pop up menu appears 3 Select New Animation Table in the pop up menu A new animation table and its properties dialog both open 4 In the Properties dialog edit the following values Name Type in a table name For this example ReceivedData Functional module Accept the default lt None gt Comment Optional Type your comment here Number of animated characters Type in 49 representing the size of the data buffer in words 1A34009 10 2014 289 Explicit Messaging Step Action 5 The completed Properties dialog looks like this Properties x Name Functional module ReceivedData jNone gt Comment Extended String Animation Number of animated characters 49 range 20 300 Cancel Click OK to close the dialog In the animation table s Name column type in the name of the variable assigned to the RECP pin ReceivedData and hit Enter The animation table displays the ReceivedData variable Expand the ReceivedData variable to display its word array where you can view the CIP response contained in the ReceivedData variable E Receimea
271. o close the dialog 6 In the animation table s Name column type in the name of the variable assigned to the databuffer ReceivedData and hit Enter The animation table displays the ReceivedData variable 7 Expand the ReceivedData variable to display its word array where you can view the CIP response contained in the ReceivedData variable ID Receiveanaa O O T Modification Force YF LF OF s H il a ReceivedData ARRAY 0 1 ReceivedData 0 NT Number of bytes Function Code ReceivedData 1 16 1234 INT Value of register 5391 Note Each array entry presents 2 bytes of data in little endian format For example 03 in word 0 is the low byte and 02 is the high byte 298 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Section 8 4 Explicit Messaging via the Unity Pro GUI What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Sending Explicit Messages to EtherNet IP Devices 300 Sending Explicit Messages to Modbus TCP Devices 302 1A34009 10 2014 299 Explicit Messaging Sending Explicit Messages to EtherNet IP Devices Overview Use the EtherNet IP Explicit Message window to send an explicit message from Unity Pro to an EtherNet IP module or device on the network An explicit message can be sent as either a connected or an unconnected message e an unconnected message requires path or addressing inf
272. o devices that are members of that VLAN The switch does not send the message to other ports A VLAN reduces network traffic blocks multicast and broadcast traffic from other VLANs provides separation between VLANs and improves system performance VLAN Types Depending upon the switch features there many different ways to define and implement VLANs Tagging type Mapping rule Description Explicit VLAN tagin Tag based Each VLAN group is assigned a unique VLAN ID which is included in Ethernet packet each Ethernet packet The switch forwards packets based on VLAN ID Implicit no VLAN tag Port based Switch ports are assigned to different VLANs when the switch is in Ethernet packet configured see example below MAC based A switch maps VLAN group membership and forwards Ethernet frames based on device MAC address Protocol based A switch maps VLAN group membership and forwards Ethernet frames based on message protocol IP subnet based A switch maps VLAN group membership and forwards Ethernet frames based on IP subnet portion of the target address 204 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Example In the port based VLAN example below switch ports 1 2 and 3 are assigned to VLAN A while switch ports 4 5 and 6 are assigned to VLAN B VLANA VLAN B IP 192 168 1 x IP 192 168 2 x Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Controller A Con
273. on module as a scanner when e the application is stopped or e the communication module receives a reset service request see page 47 Advanced mode properties are identified by the icon The EtherNet IP page looks like this Group Parameter aA Timeout tA FW_Open I O Connection Timeout 5000 ms 9 FW_Open EM Connection Timeout 3000 ms EM Connection RPI 10000 ms EM Request Timeout 10 s a Behavior f Allow RESET via explicit message False f Behavior when CPU state is STOP Stop Description OK Cancel Apply To display this page select the Channel Properties EtherNet IP node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties 70 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Properties Note Users experienced in the configuration of EtherNet IP networks can edit the following read write properties Name Description Timeout FW_Open IO Connection Timing The amount of time the communication module waits for the Forward_Open IO messaging transaction to open an implicit messaging connection Default 5000 ms FW_Open EM Connection Timing The amount of time the communication module waits for the Forward_Open IO messaging transaction to open an explicit messaging connection Default 3000 ms EM Connected RPI The value used to set t
274. on not supported 16 8106 Ownership conflict 16 8107 Target connection not found 16 8108 Invalid network connection parameter 16 8109 Invalid connection size 16 8110 Target for connection not configured 16 8111 RPI not supported 16 8113 Out of connections 16 8114 Vendor ID or product code mismatch 16 8115 Product type mismatch 16 8116 Revision mismatch 16 8117 Invalid produced or consumed application path 16 8118 Invalid or inconsistent configuration application path 16 8119 Non Listen Only connection not opened 392 1A34009 10 2014 Detected Error Codes Detected Description Error Code 16 811A Target object out of connections 16 811B RPI is smaller than the production inhibit time 16 8123 Connection timed out 16 8124 Unconnected request timed out 16 8125 Parameter detected error in unconnected request and service 16 8126 Message too large for unconnected_send service 16 8127 Unconnected acknowledge without reply 16 8131 No buffer memory available 16 8132 Network bandwidth not available for data 16 8133 No consumed connection ID filter available 16 8134 Not configured to send scheduled priority data 16 8135 Schedule signature mismatch 16 8136 Schedule signature validation not possible 16 8141 Port not available 16 8142 Link address not valid 16 8145 Invalid segment in connection path 16 8146
275. onnected devices to issue an GMP Multicast Group Join message The group message is received by all network switches which update their multicast addressing information databases in response Similarly when an Ethernet device transmits an IGMP Multicast Group Leave message all network switches update their multicast addressing information databases by removing the device from their databases Multicast messaging reduces network traffic by e requiring that a message be sent only once e sending the message only to devices for which the message is intended Recommendation Schneider Electric recommend the following e employ switches that support IGMP V2 or higher e because IGMP snooping may be disabled by default enable IGMP snooping for each network switch e confirm that one switch is configured as the IGMP querier 202 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is an OSI layer 2 protocol defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 that performs the following functions it creates a loop free logical network path for Ethernet devices that are part of a topology that includes redundant physical paths it automatically restores network communication by activating redundant links in the event the network experiences a broken link RSTP software operating simultaneously in every network switch obtains information from each switch which enables the softwar
276. op up menu select Open The Device Editor appears It displays the configurable properties for the selected module or device j Q_NOC78000 fdtConfiguration Q_NOC78000 T Communication Spas Schneider P Electric Channel Properties Switch Source Address TCP IP S Services Source IP Address Address Server 2 SNMP Sub Network Mask RSTP _EtherNet IP Network Detection oe Begin detecti ddress Z j 10 171 182 1 Security egin detection range adaress n EtherNet IP Local Slaves End detection range address L 10 171 182 254 Local Slave 1 L Items Modbus Network Detection a n 2 Begin detection range address L 10 171 182 1 E Slave 3 End detection range address L 10 171 182 254 ems Device List Help Cancel Apply F lt j Disconnected G Data sent i fea 54 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Description 4 Expand the navigation tree and select a node in the left window pane to display its properties in the right pane The list of configurable properties varies depending on the node type communication module or remote device selected in the DTM Browser 5 While you edit a parameter Unity Pro displays an icon next to the field you are editing and in the navigation tree indicating the parameter value is being edited Unity Pro displays one of the following icons This icon Indicates the importance of the parameter being edited is I High Editing this
277. operties can be viewed and edited in the RSTP General page Property Description RSTP Operation State A 2 byte value for the switch from 0 to 65535 with a default of 32768 the Bridge Priority midpoint NOTE Network switches running RSTP software periodically exchange information about themselves using special packets called Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs which act as a heartbeat The Bridge Priority value is contained in the BPDU and establishes the relative position of the switch in the RSTP hierarchy The following properties can be viewed and edited in the RSTP Advanced page Property Description Bridge Parameters Maximum Age Time This value is set to The length of time from 6 to 40 seconds that the switch waits for receipt of the next hello message before initiating a change to the RSTP topology Default 40 s Transmit Hold Count The maximum number of BPDUs from 1 to 40 that the switch can transmit per second Default 40 Hello Time read only The frequency set at 2 seconds that the embedded switch sends heartbeat BPDUs Port Parameters These properties can be separately configured for ports 3 and 4 RSTP read only This property is set to Enabled in the Services page Priority The priority assigned to the switch port an integer from 0 to 240 in increments of 16 Default 0 This value is used by the RSTP process if it needs to break a tie between two ports
278. or death A DANGER DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury S1A34009 10 2014 9 PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and its installation and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved 10 1A34009 10 2014 About the Book Z At a Glance Document Scope This manual describes the use of the Modicon M340 BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module This manual describes the creation of a complete configuration The features and functions of the module are described in the course of constructing this configuration The specific configuration settings contained in this manual are intended to be used f
279. or instructional purposes only The settings required for your specific configuration ill differ from the examples presented in this manual Validity Note The module described in this document can requires Unity Pro version 5 0 or later Related Documents For additional information refer to the online help files for the Unity Pro software and to the following technical publications Title of Documentation Reference Number Advantys STB EtherNet IP Network Interface Applications Guide 31008204 English 31008205 French 31008206 German 31008207 Spanish 31008208 Italian You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www schneider electric com 1A34009 10 2014 11 12 1A34009 10 2014 Chapter 1 Installation Overview The Ethernet communication module serves as the interface between a M340 PLC and other Ethernet network devices by means of either the EtherNet IP or the Modbus TCP communication protocol This chapter shows you how to install the module by e inserting it into a PLC backplane e connecting it to an Ethernet network e installing the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool software What Is in This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Physical Description of the BMX NOC 0401 Module 14 Module Specifications 17 Communication Specifications 19 Mounting the BMX NOC 0
280. or the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module e static IP addressing configuration data for the module and e dynamically generated data describing operations of the module s internal port and each of the module s external Ethernet ports ports 1 2 3 and 4 Port Statistics Display The Port Statistics page looks like this PORT STATISTICS Hostname Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 MAC Address _ be fb 01 f4 80 00 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address 192 168 1 4 Internal port port1 port 2 port 3 port 4 Interface label Internal port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Speed Operational N A 100Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps Duplex Operational N A TP Full Link TP Full Link TP Half Link TP Half Link L f Frames transmit OK 0 L 0 0 Frames received OK 181596 126354 73220 f l Collisions 0 0 0 Excessive collisions 0 0 Late collisions 0 0 CRC errors 0 0 Number Bytes Received 15568790 5047683 Number Inbound Packets Error 19185 Number Inbound Packets Discard 0 Number Bytes Sent J 203 Number Outbound Packets Error 100 Number Outbound Packets Discard 3 Copyright 1998 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved Click on the Reset counters button to reset the counting statistics to zero To open this page Step Action 1 Starting
281. ore devices from the Selected Devices list OK Insert the device DTMs in the Selected Devices list into the Unity Pro project If there are one or more devices in the Selected Devices list that have the same address in the Unity Pro project a message box opens asking if you want to continue If you click OK devices in the Unity Pro project that have identical addresses as the selected devices are deleted and replaced by the DTMs selected in the Selected Devices list Cancel Cancel the field bus discovery scan and do nothing Information in the three lists is discarded S1A34009 10 2014 51 Configuring Device Editor Description Use the Device Editor to view and configure Ethernet communication modules and remote devices The collection of properties you can view or configure depends on e the node type selected in the DTM Browser e communication module e remote device e whether Unity Pro is operating in Advanced Mode Displaying Properties of the Ethernet Communication Module After you open the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module in the DTM Browser the left pane 1 below of the Device Editor displays a tree control containing configurable property groups for the communication module Click on a node in the tree control to display one or more pages of module properties for the selected group in the right pane 2 below 7 M_NOC0401 Communication NOC01 TCP IP EtherNet IP Services Address Se
282. oring as follows e Use a destination or mirror port only for port mirroring and not for any other purpose Connect only the PC with packet sniffer to the mirroring port e When configuring the switch confirm that port mirroring is designed to forward packets e g incoming outgoing or both to meet your requirements e A packet sniffer s troubleshooting features should include the capabilities of analyzing network performance and monitoring network activity 206 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Agent An SNMP agent is a software component that responds to queries about the management data of the switch and reports events to another device acting as an SNMP manager The management data for a switch can include e operational state information interface status mode of operation etc e configuration parameters IP address features enabled disabled timer values etc e performance statistics frame counters event logs etc If a switch is equipped with SNMP agent software a designated SNMP manager can e retrieve management data about the switch e control the switch by editing its configuration settings e receive traps or notices of events affecting the state of the switch 1A34009 10 2014 207 Optimizing Performance Section 5 2 Control Application Design Overview In a control system control and automation are achieved by processing and
283. ormation identifying the destination device and optionally device attributes e a connected explicit message contains both path information and a connection identifier to the target device You can use explicit messaging to perform many different services Not every EtherNet IP device supports every service NOTE Before you can perform explicit messaging connect the DTM for the upstream communication module to the module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit gt Connect The EtherNet IP Explicit Message window below presents an example of both the configuration of an EtherNet IP explicit message and the response The explicit message is addressed to a remote STB NIC 2212 network interface module to obtain diagnostic information Address Service _______________Data hex ___ IP Address 192 168 1 6 Number 14 Class 4 Name Get_Attribute_Single 7 Instance 100 l Enter Path hex MV Attribute 3 20 04 24 64 30 03 x Messaging 5 a Send to Device C Connected F Repeat 500ms Unconnected Response hex _ AO 10 00 00 OF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OF 00 00 00 A Status Status 0 0x00 Status EtherNet IP 0 0x00 Sending Explicit Messages The following steps explain how to execute the EtherNet IP explicit message depicted above 300 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Step Action
284. ostics List Object 257 228 S1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Identity Object Overview The Identity object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 01 Instance IDs The Identity object presents two instances e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes Identity object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET hex dec 01 01 Vendor ID UINT xX 02 02 Device Type UINT X 03 03 Product Code UINT X 04 04 Revision STRUCT X Major USINT Minor USINT X supported not supported S1A34009 10 2014 229 CIP objects Attribute ID Description Type GET SET hex dec 05 05 Status Word x bit 2 0x01 the module is configured bits 4 7 0x03 no I O connections established 0Ox06 at least 1 I O connection in run mode 0x07 at least 1 I O connection established all in IDLE mode 06 06 Serial Number UDINT x 07 07 Product Name STRING x 18 24 Modbus Identity STRUCT X X supported not supported Services The Identity object performs the following services upon the listed object t
285. ot used 45398 0 3 12 0 3 DDO 3410 output data echo 13 not used 45399 0 3 14 0 3 DDO 3410 output status 15 not used 45400 0 5 16 0 5 DDI 3610 input data 17 not used 45401 0 5 18 0 5 DDI 3610 input status 19 not used 45402 0 5 20 0 5 DDO 3600 output data echo 21 not used 45403 0 5 22 0 5 DDO 3600 output status 23 not used 45404 0 15 24 0 7 AVI 1270 input data ch 1 25 0 7 45405 0 7 26 0 7 AVI 1270 input status ch 1 27 not used 45406 0 15 28 0 7 AVI 1270 input data ch 2 29 0 7 172 S1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Advantys Modbus Image Unity Pro Items STB Module Description Register Bit s Bytes Bit s 45407 0 7 30 0 7 AVI 1270 input status ch 2 31 not used 45408 0 7 32 0 7 AVI 1270 output status ch 1 33 not used 45409 0 7 34 0 7 AVI 1270 output status ch 2 35 not used Output Data Write Advantys Modbus Image Unity Pro Items STB Module Description Register Bit s Byte Bit s 40001 0 1 0 0 1 DDO 3200 output data 1 not used 40002 0 3 2 0 3 DDO 3410 output data 3 not used 40003 0 5 4 0 5 DDO 3600 output data 5 not used 40004 0 15 6 0 7 AVO 1250 output data ch 1 7 0 7 40005 0 15 8 0 7 AVO 1250 output data ch 2 9 0 7 This example shows you how to create 18 words of inputs and 5 words of outputs This example creates items in the following sequence e input word it
286. ote port the TCP port for the connection on the remote device Local port the TCP port for the connection on the Ethernet communication module Type the connection type EtherNet IP or Modbus TCP Mess Sent the number of messages transmitted over this connection Mess Received the number of messages received by this connection Error Sent the number of events detected on this connection NOTE e Following a request to close a connection the PLC may hold the connection open in its memory for a few minutes during which the display will reflect the open connection e The Number of Messages received is not reset after a port 502 connection is closed Therefore the count indicates the total number of messages that have been received since the module was started 1A34009 10 2014 377 Embedded Web Pages To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet Messaging If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 378 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages QoS Configuration Introduction The BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module supports the OSI layer 3 Quality of Service QoS standard defined in RFC 2475 When the QoS is enabled the module adds a differentiated services code point DSCP tag to each E
287. ould bypass the switch and directly wire the PC to either the CPU s Modbus or USB ports 158 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Adding an STB NIP 2212 Remote Device Overview Use the generic Modbus DTM selection in the Add dialog to select and insert an STB NIP 2212 module to your project Adding an STB NIP 2212 Remote Device To add the STB NIP 2212 to your project follow these steps Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the Ethernet communication module node and then click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Add The following dialog opens Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 EB Modbus Device Device Schneider Electric 1 04 0001 STBNIC2212 from EDS Device Schneider Electric 2 10 fi TCDEI 888N D1U from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 A TCDEI 888N DYU from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 A TCDEI 888P D1U from EDS Device Molex Incorporated 3 4 x cose 3 In the Add dialog select the STBNIP2212 then click Add DTM The Properties window for the STB NIP 2212 network interface module opens 1A34009 10 2014 159 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 In the General page of the Properties window edit the default Alias name to read
288. ounter button to reset the counting statistics on this page to 0 To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic The Diagnostic window opens In the left pane of the Diagnostic window select the communication module node 4 Click on the Email Diagnostic tab to open that page 1A34009 10 2014 317 Diagnostics Email diagnostic Parameters Email service parameters include the following Parameter Description Refresh Every 500ms Select this to dynamically update this page every 500ms The number of times this page has been refreshed appears immediately to the right in this example 192 Email Service The status of this service in the Ethernet communication module green operational OK orange not operational NOK Remote Email Server Status The connection status between Ethernet communication module and the SMTP server green operational OK red not operational NOK NOTE Status is checked at start up and at least every 30 minutes after start up SMTP Server IP Address IP address of the SMTP server Sender Receivers Subject The three header fields of the last Email message sent Number of Emails Sent Total number of emails sent and successfully acknowledged by the SMTP
289. p page opens Schneider LLANA Electric Hits Documentation URL Maintenance Setup 4 Setup Security Port Mirroring Copyright 1998 2010 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved 352 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Step Description On the left side of the page click on the Port Mirroring node The Port Mirroring page opens Enable Source port 4 Configure the following fields Enable Place a check mark in this field to enable port mirroring Default de selected Source Selecta port 1 4 The traffic from this port will be duplicated and sent to the destination port for diagnosis Destination Select a port other than the source port to receive the duplicated traffic of the source port Only ports with RSTP disabled can be selected Click the Save button 1A34009 10 2014 353 Embedded Web Pages Section 11 2 Monitoring the Unity Pro Application Overview This section describes how to use the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module s embedded web pages to monitor the Unity Pro application What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Using the Monitoring Page 355 Data Editor Standard 356 Working With Data Templates 361 Data Editor Lite 365 354 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Using the Mo
290. page to assign differentiated service code point DSCP values and queueing priorities to Ethernet packets based on their message type NOTE e The settings input in this page are synchronized with the values input in the Services QoS page see page 86 Edits to a common property in either page will change that value in the other page e The Explicit Message group settings are editable only when Unity Pro is operating in Advanced Mode e Confirm that every switch in your network adopts the same DSCP tagging scheme thereby providing consistent packet traffic management throughout your network 62 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring The QoS Queue page displaying the default settings looks like this QoS Queue Precision Time Control Type of Traffic DSCP Value Queue Mapping PTP Event 59 Very High PTP General 47 High EtherNet IP Control Type of Traffic DSCP Value Queue Mapping Urgent 55 High Scheduled 47 High High 43 High Low 31 Low Explicit oF Low Modbus TCP Control Type of Traffic DSCP Value Queue Mapping Modbus I O 47 High Modbus Explicit 27 Low Network Time Protocol Type of Traffic DSCP Value Queue Mapping NTP Control 59 Very High x C To display this page select the Channel Properties Switch node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor then click on the QoS Queue tab NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor se
291. pane of the Diagnostic window select the communication module node 4 Click on the RSTP Diagnostic tab to open that page RSTP Diagnostic Parameters The RSTP Diagnostic page displays the following parameters for each communication module port Parameter Description Bridge RSTP Diagnostic Bridge ID An 8 byte bridge identification field is comprised of a 2 sub fields e Bridge Priority a 2 byte value from 0 to 65535 with a default of 32768 assigned to the module s embedded Ethernet switch e MAC Address see below MAC Address The Media Access Control address of a device found on the front of the module Designated Root ID The Bridge ID of the root switch Root Path Cost The aggregate cost of port costs from this switch back to the root switch Default Hello Time The interval at which Configuration BPDU messages will be transmitted during a network convergence For RSTP this is a fixed value of 2 seconds Learned Hello Time The current Hello Time value learned from the root switch Configured Max Age The value that other switches use for MaxAge when this switch is acting as the root Valid range 6 to 40 Learned Max Age The maximum age learned from the root switch This is the actual value currently used by this switch Total Topology Changes The total number of topology changes detected by this switch since the management entity was last reset or init
292. panning tree protocol RSTP in combination with Device Editor other similarly configured network devices to manage redundant physical connections and create a loop free logical path connecting the network devices Port Mirroring duplicate the traffic entering and exiting any one of the four Ethernet Web pages ports onto another non RSTP destination port for the purpose of diagnosing the source port IGMP Snooping restrict outbound multicast transmissions to only those ports with downstream consumers lt no configuration required gt Network Time provide the source time synchronization signal for the PLC controller Device Editor Service which manages an internal clock to maintain this time Email enable the sending but not receiving of email messages from the Device Editor PLC application to a standard SMTP server 74 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring the DHCP and FDR Servers Description The Ethernet communication module includes both a DHCP and a Faulty Device Replacement FDR server The DHCP server provides IP address settings to networked Ethernet devices The FDR server provides operating parameter settings to replacement Ethernet devices that are equipped with FDR client functionality Use the Address Server page to e enable and disable the communication module s FDR service e view an automatically generated list of devices included in the communication module
293. parameter may limit or deny access to the module or device 0 Low Editing this parameter will not limit or deny access to the module or device 6 After you finish editing a page click e Apply to save your edits and keep the page open e OK to save your edits and close the page NOTE Your edits will not take effect until they are successfully downloaded from your PC to the CPU and from the CPU to the communication modules and network devices 1A34009 10 2014 55 Configuring Uploading and Downloading DTM Based Applications Introduction You can use Unity Pro to download an application file from your PC to the PLC and to upload an application file from the PLC to your PC To perform a successful upload confirm that the application file includes specific upload related information as part of the application Downloading DTM Based Applications Unity Pro applications that include DTM files require more memory than traditional Unity Pro applications The following products employ DTMs for network configuration e 140 NOC 771 01 Ethernet Communication Module for Quantum e TSX ETC 101 Ethernet Communication Module for Premium e BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet Communication Module for M340 In some cases the configurations created for these modules and the data associated with them will require more memory than is available in the CPU If the amount of memory required by an application exceeds the amount of memory tha
294. played Name Description Offline Parameter This command is disabled Online Parameter This command is disabled Compare This compares 2 devices either online or offline Configuration This opens the Device Editor for the selected communication module when the module and its DTM are disconnected Observe This command is disabled Diagnosis This opens the Diagnosis Window for the selected communication module when the module and its DTM are connected 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Name Description Additional Add EDS to library Opens the EDS File Wizard which you can use to add functions a device EDS file to the Unity Pro EDS device library Unity Pro displays the contents of EDS files as DTMs for use in the DTM Browser and Device Editor Remove EDS from library Opens the EDS Deletion from Device Library window which you can use to delete an EDS file from the device library Online Action Opens the Online Action window Depending upon the protocol s a remote device supports you can use the Online Action window to e Ping a remote EtherNet IP or Modbus TCP device view and write to EtherNet IP properties in a remote EtherNet IP device e view and write to port configuration properties in a remote EtherNet IP device EtherNet IP Explicit Message Opens the EtherNet IP Explicit Message see page 300 window which you can use to send ex
295. plicit messages to EtherNet IP remote devices Modbus TCP Explicit Message Opens the Modbus TCP Explicit Message see page 302 window which you can use to send explicit messages to Modbus TCP remote devices About Advanced Mode Displays or hides expert level properties that help define Ethernet connections See the Enabling Advanced Mode topic see page 47 for instruction on how to use this feature When you select Device menu 2 in the main contextual menu for the communication module a sub menu with the following commands is displayed Name Description Configuration This opens the Device Editor for the selected communication module when the module and its DTM are disconnected Diagnosis This opens the Diagnosis Window for the selected communication module when the module and its DTM are connected Add EDS to library Opens the EDS File Wizard which you can use to add a device EDS file to the Unity Pro EDS device library Unity Pro displays the contents of EDS files as DTMs for use in the DTM Browser and Device Editor library Remove EDS from Opens the EDS Deletion from Device Library window which you can use to delete an EDS file from the device library 1A34009 10 2014 45 Configuring Name Description Online Action Opens the Online Action window Depending upon the protocol s a remote device supports you can use the Online Action window
296. port level of the DTM is Generic Support e Uncertain match At least the Vendor and device Type ID attributes match The support level of the DTM is not Generic Support Use the field bus discovery service Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select an appropriate DTM NOTE The field bus discovery service limits its search to the range of IP addresses that is pre configured for the selected channel in the Channel Properties page see page 59 2 Right click the DTM and scroll to Field bus discovery to open the dialog box Field bus discovery ag xi NOCO1 Channel EtherNet IP Modbus TCP Protocol 0 Select a channel and a protocol for scanning cancel_ 3 Under these conditions select a channel and a protocol e The DTM has more than one channel e The channel supports more than one protocol 4 Click on OK The service starts to detect devices on the selected channel 48 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action If at least one matched device has been found the Field Bus Discovery dialog displays a list of Scanned Devices Use the controls of the Field Bus Discovery dialog to select the devices to add to your Unity Pro application After you have selected the devices you want to add in the Field Bus Discovery dialog click OK If the field bus discovery process finds at least one device with an IP address that is already used in the proj
297. propriate for your actual application Step Action 1 In the Address Settings page edit the following IP Address By default e the first three octet values equal the first three octet values of the Ethernet communication module and e the fourth octet value equals this device Number setting in this case the default value would be 004 In our continuing example type in the address 192 168 1 6 DHCP for this Device e Enabled activates the DHCP client in this device The device obtains its IP address from the DHCP service provided by the Ethernet communication module and appears on the auto generated DHCP client list see page 77 e Disabled the default de activates the DHCP client in this device Select Enabled Identified by If DHCP for this Device is Enabled this indicates the device identifier type e MAC Address or e Device Name Select Device Name Identifier If DHCP for this Device is Enabled the specific device MAC Address or Name value Accept the default setting of NIC2212_01 based on the Alias name Mask The device subnet mask The default 255 255 255 0 Accept the default value Gateway The gateway address used to reach this device The default of 0 0 0 0 indicates this device is located on the same subnet as the Ethernet communication module Accept the default value Click OK to save your edits The next step is to confi
298. put data Using the data presented in the fieldbus image you can use Unity Pro to create input and output items that map to specific status input output and output echo data NOTE Before proceeding with the following instructions confirm that you have auto configured the Advantys STB island by pressing the RST button on the front of the STB NIC 2212 module Making the Connection To connect to the STB NIC 2212 and I O modules using the Advantys configuration software Step Action available project types 1 Startup the Advantys configuration software on your PC A dialog opens displaying Select STB Select File New Workspace The New Workspace window opens below 4 For this example type in the following field values e for the field Workspace File type in Advantys e for the field Island File type in Advantys_01 New Workspace Workspace File Name Advantys Location Island File Name Name with path C Program Files Schneid isi Name with path on Files Schneider lt gt Cancel Advantys_01 C Program Files Schneider lt gt center of the screen 5 Click OK The Advantys configuration software displays an empty DIN rail in the 1A34009 10 2014 139 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 6 Select Online Connection Settings The Connection Settings window opens below 7 Inthe Conne
299. r Electric recommends the use of managed switches not unmanaged switches or hubs in process control networks A managed switch provides more functionality than an unmanaged switch including the ability to turn switch ports on or off configure port speed and duplex settings control and monitor message traffic within segments prioritize message traffic Recommended Switch Features When acquiring an Ethernet switch for your process control network confirm that the switch includes the following features Multiple speed 10 100 1000 Mbps Full duplex QoS IGMP snooping RSTP VLAN support Port mirroring SNMP agent 1A34009 10 2014 199 Optimizing Performance Transmission Speed Duplex and Auto Negotiation Introduction Most Ethernet switches support multiple transmission speeds full and half duplex communication and offer auto negotiation capability Hubs by contrast are not designed to support full duplex transmissions Duplex Full duplex enables a switch port to both transmit and receive messages simultaneously over two dedicated communication channels Half duplex by contrast permits a port to transmit or receive messages in only one direction at a time Signal collisions are possible in half duplex communications because messages are transmitted and received over a single channel Half duplex communications can cause poor performance and message loss Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation permits a
300. r Lite accepts the following IEC variables Address Type Display MW IEC internal word INT DECIMAL MD IEC double word DINT DECIMAL M IEC internal bits BOOL BOOLEAN NOTE You cannot access the Lookup Variable dialog and insert symbols into a data template using Data Editor Lite You can insert only direct addresses Re Using Data Editor Templates Data Editor Lite can reuse the same templates created with the Data Editor However Data Editor templates can use a wider range of variable types than Data Editor Lite When Data Editor Lite encounters a variable it cannot manage it displays Not Supported as the data type In this case the variable cannot be edited using Data Editor Lite S1A34009 10 2014 365 Embedded Web Pages Section 11 3 Diagnostics Overview This section describes the diagnostic services provided by the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Using the Diagnostics Page 367 Status Summary 368 Rack Viewer 371 Processor Load 373 Scanner Status 375 Messaging 377 QoS Configuration 379 Port Statistics 380 Redundancy 382 Email Diagnostics 383 Network Time Service Diagnostics 385 Properties 387 366 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Using the Diagnostics Page Diagnostics Page Click on the main menu Diagnostics command to display th
301. r the first time the module name cannot be edited If you subsequently decide to change the module name delete the existing module from the configuration then add and rename a replacement module Completing the Ethernet Network Configuration After configuring settings for inputs and outputs the next step is to configure the communication module settings beginning with its Channel Properties and then configure remote Ethernet network devices see page 175 NOTE After you input configuration settings for the communication module and remote devices return to the Configuration page of the Ethernet communication module s Properties window and click the Update application button This creates derived data type DDT variables see page 182 that display the following information and commands for your Unity Pro project e connection health bits that display the status of each connection connection control bits you can use to toggle each connection on and off the value of input and output items module and device configuration settings free memory space that has been reserved but not yet allocated 38 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Section 2 3 The Unity Pro FDT DTM Interface Overview The section describes the use of DTMs within Unity Pro What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page DTM Browser 40 DTM Browser Menu Commands 42 Field Bus Discovery
302. r transactions limit reached e EtherNet IP TCP connection or encapsulation session in progress 16 19 Connection timed out 16 22 Modbus TCP invalid response 16 23 Modbus TCP invalid device ID response 16 30 e Modbus TCP remote host is down e EtherNet IP connection open timed out 16 80 16 87 Forward_Open response detected errors 16 80 Internal detected error 16 81 Configuration detected error the length of the explicit message or the RPI rate needs to be adjusted 16 82 Device detected error target device does not support this service 16 83 Device resource detected error no resource is available to open the connection 396 1A34009 10 2014 Detected Error Codes Value Operation report most significant byte 16 84 System resource evebt unable to reach the device 16 85 Data sheet detected error incorrect EDS file 16 86 Invalid connection size 16 90 16 9F Register session response detected errors 16 90 Target device does not have sufficient resources 16 98 Target device does not recognize message encapsulation header 16 9F Unknown detected error from target 1A34009 10 2014 397 Detected Error Codes 398 1A34009 10 2014 Appendix B CIP General Status Codes CIP General Status Codes NOTE Taken by permission from The C P Networks Library Volume 1 Common Industrial Protocol CIP Edition 3 6 April 2009 The following table lists the sta
303. ransmission of a packet Excessive Collisions Frames for which transmission is not successful due to excessive collisions MAC Transmit Errors Frames for which transmission is not successful due to internal MAC sublayer transmit error Carrier Sense Errors Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or not asserted when attempting to transmit a frame Frame Too Long Frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size MAC Receive Errors Frames for which reception on an interface is not successful due to an internal MAC sublayer receive detected error 1A34009 10 2014 313 Diagnostics Bandwidth Diagnostics Introduction Use the Bandwidth Diagnostic page to display either dynamically generated or static data for the communication module s bandwidth usage Use the Refresh Every 500ms checkbox to display static or dynamic data as follows When the checkbox is This page Selected Displays data that is dynamically updated every 500 ms and Increments the number at the top of the table each time data is refreshed De selected Displays static data and Does not Increment the number at the top of the table which instead displays a constant value NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then
304. rdware Catalog Updating the Hardware Catalog makes the new Ethernet module or device available for addition to your Unity Pro application To update the Hardware Catalog Step Action 1 In the Unity Pro main menu select Tools Hardware Catalog The Hardware Catalog window opens 2 In the Hardware Catalog window select the DTM Catalog tab to display a module and device DTM list At the time of initial software installation the catalog displays no devices ai x All devices Device Type Vendor Devices Groups Protocols Ki l gt r ia gt External Update Tool Reload catalog 4 4 gt gt if _4 S FB Bus A_DIO Bus A Local Bus RIO Bus DTM Catalog 3 Click the External Update Tool button The FDT DTM Catalog window opens zax Query Device Types 7 TZ Block Devices Version Date Vendor B Communication Device if Gateway Module Update Stop Close 4 In the FDT DTM Catalog window click Update The window refreshes itself as indicated by the progress bar in the lower right corner of the window 120 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action After the update has finished click Close The FDT DTM Catalog window closes and the Hardware Catalog displays In the Hardware Catalog window click Reload catalog to refresh the DTM list Hardware catalog ajx E All devices
305. ribute_Single Enter Path Optional Select this check box to enable the message path field where you can manually enter the entire path to the target device In this example the path is not manually entered NOTE Displayed only when Advanced Mode is enabled Data The data to be sent to the target device for services that send data In this example leave blank Messaging Select the type of explicit message to send e Connected e Unconnected In this example select Unconnected Repeat 500 ms Select this check box to re send the explicit message every 500 ms In this example leave this blank 4 After your explicit message is configured click Send to Device The Response area displays the data sent to the configuration tool by the target device in hexadecimal format The Status area displays messages indicating whether or not the explicit message has succeeded 5 Click Close to close the window 1A34009 10 2014 301 Explicit Messaging Sending Explicit Messages to Modbus TCP Devices Overview Use the Modbus Explicit Message window to send an explicit message from Unity Pro to a Modbus TCP module or device on the network You can use explicit messaging to perform many different services Not all Modbus TCP devices support all services NOTE Before you can perform explicit messaging connect the DTM for the upstream communication module to the module itself To do this select the mo
306. ring Introducing the Local Slave Local Slave Networking Example The Ethernet communication module supports up to three instances of the local slave functionality The local slave functionality allows other scanners on the network to read from and write to the Ethernet communication module using implicit messaging Each local slave instance can accept one exclusive owner connection and one listen only connection Through a local slave a remote scanner can access the communication module s CIP Assembly object see page 231 The local slave function is especially beneficial for peer to peer data exchanges at a repetitive rate NOTE e The Ethernet communication module can provide three local slave adapter instances while simultaneously performing as a scanner These roles are not mutually exclusive e The local slave is exclusively an EtherNet IP functionality In this example the local slave instance is part of the following topology The sample configuration above includes the following devices e Aprimary PLC 1 incorporating the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module with one local slave instance enabled The PLC scans I O data from remote devices 4 and 5 e A secondary PLC 2 that listens to the scan of the primary PLC s local slave by the third party PLC 6 e A managed Ethernet switch 3 102 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring e An Advantys S
307. ror Response DeviceNet only 15 21 Restore X X 16 22 Save xX xX X indicates the service is available indicates the service is not available S1A34009 10 2014 275 Explicit Messaging Service Code Description Available in Hex Dec DATA_EXCH Unity Pro GUI block 17 23 No Operation NOP x x 18 24 Get_Member X X 19 25 Set_Member X X 1A 26 Insert_Member X X 1B 27 Remove_Member x x 1C 28 GroupSync x 1D 31 29 49 Reserved X indicates the service is available indicates the service is not available 276 S1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH Configuring the Address Parameter To configure the Address parameter use the ADDM function to convert the character string described below to an address ADDM rack slot channel ip_address message_type protocol where This field Represents rack the number assigned to the rack containing the communication module slot the position of the communication module in the rack channel the communication channel set to a value of 0 ip_address the IP address of the remote device for example 193 168 1 6 message_type the type of message presented as a three character string either e UNC indicating an unconnected message or e CON indicating a connected message protocol
308. rt of a topology that includes redundant physical paths and automatically restores network communication by activating redundant links in the event the network experiences a service interruption Redundancy Display The Redundancy page looks like this REDUNDANCY RSTP State port 3 L isabled RSTP State port 4 Disabled Copyright 2000 2009 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet Switch gt Redundancy 3 If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 382 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Email Diagnostics Diagnosing SMTP Transmissions Use the SMTP Diagnostics web page to display dynamically generated data describing the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module Email transmissions NOTE The Email service is enabled in the Services page and the configuration settings are input in the SMTP Configuration page of the module DTM The SMTP Diagnostics web page looks like this Monitoring EMAIL DIAGNOSTICS Status Operatonal Diagnostics Status IV IP Address 192 168 1 10 Sender Address Operator1 company com Recipient Address merle mainoffice com Subject Pump 1 pumping mud Merle shut her down
309. rver SNMP Access Control QoS RSTP G EtherNet IP Local Slaves amp Local Slave 1 Items ic Local Slave 2 Items B Local Slave 3 Items a Device List B NIC2212_01 Read Input Write Output Data Items Logging Help m 0 xl Schneider Electric M Source Address Source IP Address Sub Network Mask 192 168 1 99 7 l 255 255 255 0 r EtherNet IP Network Detection 192 168 1 1 192 168 1254 Begin detection range address End detection range address M Modbus Network Detection 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 254 Begin detection range address End detection range address OK Cancel Apply lt Disconnected Q Data Set 52 S1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Property Types The Device Editor displays an icon next to many device properties The following three icons are displayed This icon Indicates the property is Read only The property value cannot be edited in this page gt Read write The property value can be edited in this page An expert level communication protocol property that is displayed only when 3 Advanced Mode is enabled Displaying Property Definitions Many property configuration pages provide an on screen definition of the property you are editing To display a property definition in the Description section of the page select that property in the property list
310. rvices 275 Configuring EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging Using DATA_EXCH 277 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Get_Attribute_Single 279 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Read Modbus Object 283 EtherNet IP Explicit Message Example Write Modbus Object 287 274 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Explicit Messaging Services Overview Every explicit message performs a service Each service is associated with a service code or number You will need to identify the explicit messaging service by its name decimal number or hexadecimal number You can execute explicit messages using either the DATA 1 Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Services EXCH function block in Unity Pro or the The services available in Unity Pro include but are not limited to the services listed below Service Code Description Available in Hex Dec DATA_EXCH Unity Pro GUI block 0 0 Reserved 1 1 Get_Attributes_All X X 2 2 Set_Attributes_All X X 3 3 Get_Attribute_List x 4 4 Set_Attribute_List x 5 5 Reset X X 6 6 Start xX X 7 7 Stop x x 8 8 Create X X 9 9 Delete X X A 10 Multiple_Service_Packet x B C 11 12 Reserved D 13 Apply_Attributes x x E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x x F 15 Reserved 10 16 Set_Attribute_Single x x 11 17 Find_Next_Object_Instance x x 12 13 18 19 Reserved 14 20 Er
311. s and IP Address settings click on the Debug page Ethernet 1 Port 16 100 RJ45 e a Run ERR STS Ti Configuration I Debug Address Information MAC Address IP Address Subnetwork mask Gateway address Function Ethernet Task MAST S1A34009 10 2014 335 Diagnostics Channel Detected Faults To display the active faults detected on the communication channel Step Action 1 In the Channel area select the communication channel 2 To display the communication module s detected active faults click on the Fault page Ethernet 1 Port 10 100 RJ45 OE Run ERR STS Internal fault External fault Other fault Hardware config fault Function Ethernet Task MAST NOTE You can also access the channel detected error bit CH_ERROR by using the Unity Pro Animation Table to display the lr m ch ERR object 336 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Communication Module Diagnostics in Unity Pro Overview Use the Ethernet Module window in Unity Pro to diagnose the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module In this window you can access e three icons that reflect the current status of selected LEDs e the Overview page where you can view a description of the module e Fault page which displays detected active faults for the communication module e I O Objects page where you can view and
312. s indicated above a red X superimposed on a node indicates the DTM for that node is not installed on the PC To resolve this situation click the right mouse button on the node to open a pop up menu with the following two commands Command Description Delete Removes the selected node and its sub nodes from the DTM Browser Properties Opens the following dialog which you can use to identify the name of the missing DTM Properties of NOCO1 j x General Device information DTM information Protocol information Name EIP Master DTM Vendor Schneider Electric Version 2 0 7 0 FDT version 2 1 2 0 0 Date 2012 01 20 Component ElPMasterDTM DTMCore Cancel Apply Help 1A34009 10 2014 41 Configuring DTM Browser Menu Commands Overview The DTM Browser includes a pop up contextual right click menu that displays commands for the currently selected DTM The list of available commands consists of e universal commands as determined by the selected node level e host PC node level 1 e communication module node level 2 e remote device node level 3 e device specific commands as determined by the device DTM Host PC Node Commands The Host PC node contextual menu includes the following commands Name Description Add Opens the Add dialog containing a subset of the Hardware Catalog allowing the selection of a communication module DTM Check DTM Check
313. s the current project for invalid DTMs or DTMs that are not devices installed in the PC If the results of the check include invalid or not installed DTMs they are displayed in the User errors tab in the information window and a red Xx is superimposed over their icons in the DTM Browser DTM services Displays the communication DTMs selection as well as the device topology their respective IP addresses and connection state In this dialog for each device you can connect disconnect load from devices or store to devices You can also choose to stop communication or continue activity when detected errors occur DTM hardware Displays the DTM catalog tab of the Hardware Catalog dialog catalog Expand all Displays every DTM in the project Collapse all Displays only the communication DTMs in the project 1 This command also appears in the Unity Pro Edit menu 2 This command also appears in the Unity Pro View menu 42 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Communication Module and Remote Device Node Commands The DTM Browser s contextual menu has the following items Name Description Open This opens the Device Editor for the selected communication module NOTE Double clicking the left mouse button on the DTM in the DTM Browser also opens this window Add 1 This opens the Add dialog displaying a subset of the Hardware Catalog allowing the selection of a DTM NOTE
314. sage Response Time 2 x Message Traverse Time Server Processing Time In the above formula 2 indicates a round trip required for client server communication 220 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance After Message Response Time is calculated you can determine and configure the following parameters both of which are found in the Channel Properties EtherNet IP page of the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool e EM Request Timeout value and e EM Connection RPI 1A34009 10 2014 221 Optimizing Performance Section 5 3 Projecting Ethernet Network Performance Network Load and Bandwidth Calculation Example Network Devices This example estimates the performance for an Ethernet network composed of the following devices e a PLC that controls 3 remote I O stations A B and C e BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module acting as the local I O scanner installed in the PLC rack e an 8 port Ethernet managed switch e aPC running used to obtain diagnostic data via explicit messages running the following software Unity Pro the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool e 4remote devices acting as an I O adapter A for a rack of I O modules a second I O adapter B for a rack of I O modules a remote I O drive C a remote I O scanner D Unity Pro software running in the PC is used to configure the CPU controller For programming purposes you need a connection to the PLC eith
315. scanned devices e A value of Stopped indicates the local system is not scanning In this case any data that appears in the Scanner Status grid is meaningless e Number of transactions per second e Number of connections The Scanner Status web page looks like this SCANNER STATUS Scanner status Operational Number of transactions persec 83 Numberofconnections 3 Scanner Status 16 32 17 48 33 64 49 Non Configured Scanned H Not Scanned E Fault Copyright 1998 2007 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved In the Scanner Status grid the colors that appear in each block indicate the following states for specific remote devices GREEN indicates that a device is being scanned BLACK indicates that I O scanning of the specific device has been intentionally disabled GRAY indicates an device that is not configured RED indicates a suspect device S1A34009 10 2014 375 Embedded Web Pages NOTE A green Scanner Status indicator in the grid can remain green for a remote scanned device after the Ethernet cable is detached from that device This situation can occur if the health timeout value for that device is set to 0 NOTE To avoid this result and to help promote the accurate reporting of I O scanning health configure an operational health timeout value in the range 1 65535 in 1 ms increments The grid also indicates the protocol used to communicate with the remote device e MB indicates
316. select Edit Connect The Bandwidth Diagnostic page looks like this Ethernet Diagnostic Refresh Every 500ms Group Parameter Bandwidth Diagnostic Unit Description 1 0 Scanner EtherNet IP Sent EtherNet IP Received Modbus TCP Sent Modbus TCP Received O Adapter EtherNet IP Sent EtherNet IP Received 1 0 Module Module Capacity Module Utilization Messaging Client EtherNet IP Activity Modbus TCP Activity Messaging Server EtherNet IP Activity Modbus TCP Activity Module Processor Utilization Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s Packets s 314 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic The Diagnostic window opens 3 In the left pane of the Diagnostic window select the communication module node 4 Click on the Bandwidth Diagnostic tab to open that page Bandwidth Diagnostic Parameters The Bandwidth Diagnostic page displays the following parameters for the communication module Parameter Description I O Scanner EtherNet IP Sent The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has sent since the last reset in packets second Et
317. select the device node in the DTM Browser then select Edit gt Connect To open the Online Parameters window follow these steps Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the node for a remote device 2 Click the right mouse button and in the pop up menu select Device menu gt Online Parameters The Online Parameters window opens for the selected remote device 3 In the left pane of the Online Parameters window select a connection node Unity Pro displays the parameters relating to the selected connection in the right pane NOTE The list of parameters displayed in the Online Parameters window depends upon e the device selected in the DTM Browser and e the connection selected in the left pane of the Online Parameters window 266 1A34009 10 2014 Online Action An example of the Online Parameters window in this case for the STB NIC 2212 remote network interface device looks like this iz Parameter Get Values from EDs gt Input Size 0 gt Output Size 0 gt HMI to PLC Size 0 z gt PLC to HMI Size 0 Synchronize gt Diagnostic Data Size 20 r Description El zi Status Read only parameters are identified by a locked icon Editable parameters are identified by a blue arrowhead f gt Displaying Default Parameter Settings To view the default parameter settings for the remote device click the Get Values from EDS button Unity Pro reads
318. server Time Since Last Email Counts the number of seconds since the last email was successfully sent Last Error Hexadecimal code describing the reason for the last unsuccessful Email transmission see page 405 The value 0 indicates no unsuccessful transmissions Time Since Last Email Counts the number of seconds since the last email was successfully sent Number of Errors Total number of emails that either could not be sent were sent but were not successfully acknowledged by the SMTP server Email Service Not Reachable Number of times the SMTP server could not be reached Link checked every 30 minutes 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Network Time Service Diagnostics Diagnosing the Network Time Service Use the Network Time Service Diagnostic page to display dynamically generated data describing the operation of the network time protocol NTP service that you configured in the Network Time Service page see page 97 in Unity Pro NOTE Before you can open the Diagnostic window connect the DTM for the target communication module to the physical module itself To do this select the module node in the DTM Browser then select Edit Connect The Network Time Service Diagnostic page looks like this 1 Diagnostic Network Time Service Diagnostic _ LRSTP Diagnostic j Email Di Refresh Every500ms 785 Status Network Time Service Last Upda
319. shes the collection of DDTs and variables by adding editing or deleting previously generated DDTs and variables each time you click on the Update application button above or select either Build Build Changes or Build Rebuild All Project 182 1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Step Action below Project Browser Ta Structural View fan Project E Configuration G Rg Local Bus aS Derived Data Types T_NIC2212_01_IN T_NIC2212_01_OUT Ga T_NIP2212_01_IN T T_NIP2212_01_OUT Gy T_NOC01_IN T T_NOC01_LS1_IN T T_NOC01_LS1_OUT Ey T_NOC01_OUT Derived FB Types CA Variables amp FB instances t Communication Program Animation Tables Operator Screens Documentation Click OK The Project Browser displays the new or edited derived data types S1A34009 10 2014 183 Working With Derived Data Types Working with Derived Data Type Variables Derived Data Type Variables When you click on the Update application button Unity Pro creates a collection of derived data types and variables These are used by Unity Pro to support communication and data transfer between the PLC and the various local slaves remote devices and their I O items You can access these derived data types and variables in the Unity Pro Data Editor and add them to a user defined Animation Table where you can monitor read only variables and edit read write variables Use
320. sign specific input and output pins only to the derived data types and variables automatically created by Unity Pro The Sample Network The sample network is a part of the same physical network that has been the subject of our continuing configuration example and includes e the Ethernet communication module named NOC01 e an STB NIC 2212 EtherNet IP network interface module with I O modules named NIC2212_01 Note that when a new network is created Unity Pro presents three local slave nodes that can be activated and pre assigns them device numbers 000 001 and 002 By default each local slave is not activated Therefore each local slave s inputs and outputs are not initially assigned a MW memory address The following example describes the effect of activating a local slave function after another remote device has already been configured and added to the network In this ca The sample Ethernet network has been configured as follows e Total network inputs and outputs are set in the Configuration page of the Ethernet communication module in Unity Pro e 100 input words are reserved beginning at MW01 e 100 output words are reserved beginning at MW101 e Connection bits for the project include e 32 input bytes 16 words for health bits with an instance name of NOCO1_IN e 32 output bytes 16 words for control bits with an instance name of NOC01_OUT 1A34009 10 2014 193 Working With Derived Data Types e Local slave i
321. sition Configuration bucpt BOOTP STORED CLEAR IP Mode lt no configuration gt No Conflict Get IP address No Conflict Get No Conflict Get No Conflict from DHCP server using IP address from IP address from Use default device name from rotary BOOTP server e flash memory IP address switches Start basic services or Start basic Start basic services only only e BOOTP server services only e use default IP address Start basic services only Static or Flash memory Conflict Get IP address from DHCP server using device name from rotary switches Start basic services only Conflict Get IP address from BOOTP server Start basic services only No Conflict Get IP address from the application Start services configured in the application DHCP or BOOTP with no configured No Conflict Get IP address from DHCP server using No Conflict Get IP address from No Conflict Get IP address from device name device name from rotary BOOTP server BOOTP server switches Start services Start services Start services configured in the configured in the configured in the application application application DHCP with a Conflict if device name on Conflict Get No Conflict Get configured switches differs from name in IP address from IP address from device name application or No Conflict if BOOTP server DHCP server using names are equal Get IP address from DHCP server using device name fro
322. ss 1A34009 10 2014 369 Embedded Web Pages The Services section of the page can present the following functional conditions Function Color Text Descriptions DHCP Server Enabled FDR Server Disabled QoS Tagging IGMP Snooping Access Control Port Mirroring RSTP Network Time Service Enabled Email Service Disabled Scanner Status Green Working properly Red At least one connection is bad Gray Not configured 370 S1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Rack Viewer Introduction Use the Rack Viewer to access web pages that describe the identity placement configuration and operation of modules in the M340 rack To view information describing a specific module including the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module click on the image of that module in the Rack Viewer Rack Display The Rack Viewer looks like this when it is first opened RACK VIEWER dddress K FO W eee Ethernet a Modbus FactoryCast Copyright 1998 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Rack Viewer If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER S1A340
323. ss of 00 00 54 10 8A 05 has a default IP address of 10 10 138 5 Ox8A 138 0x05 5 e Default Sub Network Mask The default address is 255 0 0 0 a class A mask e Default Gateway Address The default gateway address is identical to the default IP address 66 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Duplicate Address Checking Before going online the module sends out at least 4 ARP address resolution protocol messages with a proposed IP address e if an answer is returned e another network device is already using the proposed IP address e the module will not use the proposed IP address but will instead use the default IP address e if an answer is not returned e the module is assigned the proposed IP address along with the associated network parameters NOTE When powering up an entire network some switches may be slow to complete the power up process This can cause some ARP messages to be dropped To help avoid this situation Schneider Electric recommends that when powering up an entire network confirm that every network switch completes its power up cycle before powering up the PLCs 1A34009 10 2014 67 Configuring Resolving Conflicting Hardware and Software IP Address Settings The following table summarizes the status of the Ethernet channel depending on the Configuration Mode set in the application and the positions of the 2 rotary switches on the back of the module Application Rotary Switch Po
324. st The messaging connection was lost 08 Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this object class instance 09 Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data detected 0A Attribute list error An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non zero status 1A34009 10 2014 399 CIP General Status Codes General Status Name Description of Status Status Code in hex 0B Already in requested The object is already in the mode state being requested by the service mode state 0c Object state conflict The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode state oD Object already exists The requested instance of object to be created already exists 0E Attribute not settable A request to modify a non modifiable attribute was received OF Privilege violation A permission privilege check was unsuccessful 10 Device state conflict The device s current mode state prohibits the execution of the requested service 11 Reply data too large The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response buffer 12 Fragmentation of a The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive primitive value data value i e half a REAL data type 13 Not enough data The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation 1
325. switch port connected to a remote device that also supports auto negotiation to automatically configure itself for the maximum speed and duplex configuration supported by both devices However it may be necessary to manually configure the speed and duplex settings of the switch port if its peer device does not possess auto negotiation capability Recommendation Schneider Electric recommends that you employ only switches that support e both auto negotiation and manual configuration of speed and duplex settings e multiple speeds 10 100 1000 Mbps e both full duplex and half duplex 200 1A34009 10 2014 Optimizing Performance Quality of Service QoS Introduction A switch that supports QoS packet tagging can be configured to deliver higher priority messages before messages with a lower or no priority This enhances system determinism and increases the timely delivery of prioritized messages In the absence of QoS tagging the switch delivers various application messages on a first in first out basis This can result in poor system performance caused by the long forwarding delay and late delivery of high priority application messages which may be handled after lower priority messages Types of QoS The tagging types are based on the switch configuration Tagging type Priority mapping rule Description Explicit QoS tag in DSCP or TOS field in Each IP based Ethernet packet contains a Ethernet packet IP header
326. syntax in the custom time zone rules file 386 1A34009 10 2014 Embedded Web Pages Properties Introduction The Properties web page displays read only data describing the particular BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module installed in your system Properties Display The Properties page looks like this PROPERTIES Device type 12 Product code 2052 Product name BMX NOC 0401 Revision 1 01 Serial number 134347887 Status 100 Vendor name 243 Copyright 2000 2009 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Properties If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 1A34009 10 2014 387 Embedded Web Pages 388 1A34009 10 2014 Appendices What Is in This Appendix The appendix contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page A Detected Error Codes 391 B CIP General Status Codes 399 C Modbus Exception Response Codes 403 D Email Detected Error Response Codes 405 S1A34009 10 2014 389 390 1A34009 10 2014 Appendix A Detected Error Codes Overview This chapter contains a list of codes that describe the st
327. t is available in the CPU Unity Pro displays a message during the build process before the application is downloaded to the PLC When this situation occurs exclude the additional upload related information from the application to complete the build and enable the application download To do this make the following configuration change in Unity Pro Step Action 1 In the main menu select Tools Project Settings The Project Settings window opens 2 In the left pane of the Project Settings window select General gt PLC embedded data 56 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Step Action 3 In the right pane de select Upload information Project Settings ff 2 xI Project Settings a Sara torbii Data dictionary r anagement of build messages n 5 Build settings Upload information 0 lt Project autosaving on download E PLC embedded data O PLC diagnostics Upload information management Automatic Variables PEE z Program Optimize data on line change E Operator Screens import S Export x Reset All OK Apply Cancel Help 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the Project Settings window After the Upload information setting is disabled you can build the application and download it to the PLC NOTE An application in which the Upload information setting has been disabled cannot later be uploaded from the PLC to the PC Uploading DTM Based Applications D
328. t items in support of the peer to peer data transfers between and among scanners 1A34009 10 2014 103 Configuring Configuring a Local Slave Description The Ethernet communication module presents three identical Local Slave configuration pages Use each page to configure a separate local slave instance Create a local slave instance by e enabling and naming the local slave e specifying the size of local slave input and output assemblies e configuring local slave variable names To display this page select one of the three Local Slave nodes in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties The following steps describe a sample configuration for Local Slave 1 Your configuration may be different Configuration Example Local Slave 1 In the sample network configuration the application in the third party PLC produces data which is available in the PLC s Ethernet communication module as inputs In this example the third party device produces the following information e production totals for manufacturing line A e production totals for manufacturing line B e the number of production interruption events for line A e the number of production interruption events for line B Any information that needs to be passed to the third party device for example confirmation that dat
329. t link has been established Green A 100 Mbit Ethernet link has been established ACT Activity Green Off There is no receive or transmit activity Flashes Green Indicates activity S1A34009 10 2014 307 Diagnostics Section 9 2 Unity Pro Software Diagnostics Overview This section describes the diagnostic tools provided by the Unity Pro configuration software that you can use to monitor the condition of the Ethernet communication module What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Using the Diagnostic Window 309 Ethernet Port Diagnostics 311 Bandwidth Diagnostics 314 Email Diagnostics 317 Network Time Service Diagnostics 319 Communication Module RSTP Diagnostics 322 Local Slave Connection Diagnostics 325 Local Slave or Connection I O Value Diagnostics 329 Logging 331 308 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Using the Diagnostic Window Introduction Use the Diagnostic window to display e LED icons in the left pane of the window that indicate the operating status of modules devices and connections e pages in the right pane of the window that present diagnostic data for the following e the communication module e local slave nodes activated for the communication module e EtherNet IP connections between the communication module and a remote EtherNet IP device NOTE Before you can open the Diagnost
330. te 11 7 Seconds Network Time Server Status O Current Date l 21 Oct 2011 Current Time 14 27 53 DST Status ON Quality 0 Microseconds Second Requests 0 Responses Q Errors 0 Last Error 16 0 Server Information Primary NTP Server IP WSS oo UNS os We 9 Secondary NTP Server IP 192 168 1 2 Polling Period 20 Seconds Daylight Saving Settings DST Start Month March Day of Week Sunday Week 4 Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Offset 360 Mins Auto Adjust Clock for Daylight Savings Enabled Click the Reset Counter button to reset the counting statistics on this page to 0 S1A34009 10 2014 319 Diagnostics To open this page Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the communication module and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 In the menu select Device menu Diagnostic The Diagnostic window opens 3 In the left pane of the Diagnostic window select the communication module node 4 Click on the NTP Diagnostic tab to open that page Network Time Service Diagnostic Parameters Time synchronization service parameters are in the table Parameter Description Refresh Every 500ms Select this to dynamically update this page every 500ms The number of times this page has been refreshed appears immediately to the right in this example 785 Network Time Service Operatio
331. the Fieldbus Image page 1 0 Image Overview Modbus Image HMI lt gt PLC aes Data ee 45394 EEEEEEEEEEEEEE TA T A T A A T T a a Location Family Module Item Label Output Data Register 15 Each table cell contains an integer that identifies the relative rack position of a data producing receiving module with input or output data in that cell For example e the STB DDI 3230 input module is the first data producing or receiving module in the rack its data and status information is indicated by the integer 1 in bits 0 1 of registers 45392 and 45393 in the Input Data table e the STB DDO 3600 output module is the sixth data producing module in the rack its output echo and status data is designated by the integer 6 in bits 0 5 of register 45402 and in bits 0 5 of register 45403 in the Input Data table its output data is designated by the integer 6 in bits 0 5 of register 40003 in the Output Data table NOTE e Select a cell in either the Input Data or Output Data tables to display in the middle of the page a description of the cell data and its source module e Convert the size of the Input Data table and the Output Data table from words to bytes i e divide by 2 then use that information when setting the RD Length inputs and WR Length outputs parameters in the Request Setting page for the remote Modbus TCP device 170 1A34009 10 2014 Adding De
332. the communication module NOTE RSTP can be implemented only when every network switch is configured to support RSTP The RSTP General page looks like this General Advanced m RSTP Operation State Bridge Priority 1A34009 10 2014 89 Configuring The RSTP Advanced page looks like this General Advanced Bridge Parameters Maximum Age Time Ss 20 Transmit Hold Count 40 Times l 2 Hello Time s Port Parameters m Port 3 Parameters RSTP Enabled gt Priority RTP Cost Ato gt Edge Port Auto z Point to Point Ato gt Port 4 Parameters RSTP Enabled z Priority RTP Cost ato gt Value Edge Port Auto z Point to Point ato z OK Cancel Apply To display these pages Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the RSTP field to Enabled then click OK or Apply The RSTP node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the RSTP node in the navigation tree then click on either the General or Advanced tab to display that page NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties 90 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring RSTP Properties The following pr
333. the device number of the target device behind a Modbus TCP to Modbus gateway NOTE When accessing data in the Ethernet communication module itself use 255 When accessing data in the application running in the PLC use a value from 0 to 254 a value of 1 is recommended Because the remote device itself is the request target accept the default value of 255 Health The maximum allowed period in milliseconds between device responses from 0 120000 ms in Timeout increments of 5 ms When this setting is exceeded the health timeout bit is set to 1 The default 1500 ms Accept the default value of 1500 Repeti The data scan rate from 0 60000 ms in intervals of 5 ms The default 60 ms Accept the default tive Rate value of 60 RD Address in the remote device of the input data image The input data image begins at word 45391 Address Because there is an offset of 40000 in the M340 platform type in a value of 5391 RD The number of words in the remote device from 0 125 that the communication module will read Length Because the Modbus device will be configured for 18 words of input items type in a value of 18 Last The behavior of inputs in the application in the event communication is lost Value e Hold Value the default e Set To Zero Accept the default WR Address in the remote device of the output data image The output data image begins at word Address 40000 Because there is an offset of 40000 in the M340 platform type in a
334. the following pages e Properties e Address Setting NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties Configuring the Properties Page The Properties page for an STB NIC 2212 network interface module looks like this Properties Address Setting r Properties Number 003 Active Configuration Enabled x Comment wi Default Name lO Structure Name Input Structure Name T_NIC2212_01_IN Variable Name NIC2212_01_IN r Output Structure Name T_NIC2212_01_OUT Variable Name NIC2212_01_OUT m Items Management Import Mode Manual 7 Reimport items OK Cancel Apply 1A34009 10 2014 129 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network The following settings are used in this sample configuration Use settings that are appropriate for your actual application Step Action 1 In the Properties section of the page edit the following Number The relative position of the device in the list from 0 to 127 For this example accept the default of 003 Active Configuration Enabled adds this device to the Unity Pro project configuration e Disabled removes this device from the Unity Pro project configuration Accept the default setting of Enabled 2 In the IO Structure Name section of the page edit the following Input area Structure Name Read only
335. therNet IP Interface Diagnostics object performs the following services upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All x X Returns the value of all attributes 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single X Returns the value of the specified attribute 4C 76 Get_and_Clear x Returns and clears the values of all instance attributes X supported not supported 248 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics Object Overview The EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 351 hex 849 decimal Instance IDs The EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics object presents two instances e 0 class e 1 instance Attributes EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision x 02 Max Instance x X supported not supported Instance ID 1 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET 01 IO Status Table STRUCT X Size UINT Status ARRAY of UNINT X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 249 CIP objects Services The EtherNet IP IO Scanner Diagnostics object performs the following services
336. thernet Processor Load 3 If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 1A34009 10 2014 373 Embedded Web Pages Processor Load Parameters The Processor Load page displays the following parameters for the communication module Parameter Description Module Load Processor Utilization The percent of Ethernet communication module processor capacity used by the present level of communication activity The background color of the value changes depending on the percentage utilization 1 0 Scanner EtherNet IP Sent writes The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has sent since the last reset in packets second EtherNet IP Received read The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has received since the last reset in packets second Modbus TCP Requests The number of Modbus TCP requests the module has sent since the last reset in packets second Modbus TCP Responses The number of Modbus TCP responses the module has received since the last reset in packets second I O Adapter EtherNet IP Sent writes The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has sent in the role of a local slave since the last reset in packets second EtherNet IP Received read The number of EtherNet IP packets the module has received in the role of a local slave since the last reset in packets second
337. thernet packet it transmits thereby indicating the priority of that packet The QoS Configuration page displays both the e status of the QoS Ethernet packet tagging service enabled or disabled and e the QoS service configuration settings NOTE The QoS service is enabled in the Services page and the configuration settings are input in the QoS page of the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool QoS Configuration Display The QoS Configuration page looks like this QoS CONFIGURATION Status Enabled DSCP Value for IO Data Urgent Priority Messages DSCP Value for IO Data Schedule Priority Messages DSCP Value for IO Data High Priority Messages DSCP Value for IO Data Low Priority Messages DSCP Value for Explicit Message DSCP Value for IO Messages DSCP Value for Explicit Message DSCP Value for Network Time Service 59 Copyright 2000 2009 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights Reserved This page is read only To open this page Step Action 1 Starting at the Home page click the Diagnostics main menu item The Diagnostics page opens 2 On the left side of the Diagnostics page select Ethernet QoS Configuration 3 If necessary type in the HTTP web access password NOTE The default password is USER 1A34009 10 2014 379 Embedded Web Pages Port Statistics Introduction Use the Port Statistics page to display the following data f
338. tion NOTE Schneider Electric recommends you reserve at least the following amounts for processing explicit messaging e 10 of network bandwidth e 10 of CPU processing capacity for each network device Message Load and Message Bandwidth Message Load in packets per second PPS represents the number of packets in a single message that are received and sent within one second Message Load can be estimated as follows Message Load number of packets per connection x number of connections RPI The number of packets per connection value depends on the capacity of the device and can be either e 1 for connections that support uni directional communication e 2 for connections that support input and output for producer consumer mode or request and response for client server mode per one time bi directional exchange or The connection can be used for either explicit or implicit messaging For UDP based explicit messaging assume that each client represents one connection and that messages are transmitted cyclically Message Bandwidth in bits can be calculated as follows Message Bandwidth message packet size bits x Message Load Based on the portion of network bandwidth you want to allocate to a particular message you can use the Message Load and Message Bandwidth formulae to calculate the fastest RPI for the message Device Load and Device Bandwidth Device Load measured in number of packets represents the
339. tion Refer to the Unity Pro online help for instructions on how to configure the DATA_EXCH block Configuring ADDM Block Unit ID Settings When you configure the DATA_EXCH block use the ADDM block to set the DATA_EXCH block s Address parameter The ADDM block presents the configuration format ADDM rack slot channel ip_address UnitID message_type protocol where The parameter Represents rack the number assigned to the rack containing the communication module slot the position of the communication module in the rack channel the communication channel set to a value of 0 ip_address the IP address of the remote device for example 192 168 1 7 Unit ID the destination node address also known as the Modbus Plus on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index value message_type the three character string TCP protocol the three character string MBS The Unit ID value in a Modbus message indicates the destination of the message The manner in which the communication module handles the Unit ID value depends upon its role as either a server or a client When the communication module acts as a e server a message with Unit ID value of 255 is directed to and processed by the communication module itself Other messages are passed to the CPU e client a message with Unit ID value of 255 is directed to and handled by the communication module itself Other values are passed to
340. tion pages for the remote device to subscribe to this service The list of Automatically Added Devices contains the following information for each networked device Property Description Device Number The number assigned to the device in the Unity Pro configuration IP Address The client device IP address Enable DHCP TRUE indicates that the device subscribes to the DHCP service Identifier Type Indicates the mechanism used by the server to recognize the client MAC address or DHCP device name Identifier The actual MAC address or DHCP device name Mask The client device subnet mask Gateway The IP address a DHCP client device will use to access other devices that are not located on the local subnet A value of 0 0 0 0 constrains the DHCP client device by allowing it to communicate only with devices on the local subnet 1A34009 10 2014 77 Configuring Subscribing to the DHCP Service for a Device that is Part of the Configuration An Ethernet device that is part of the communication module Ethernet configuration can subscribe to the communication module s IP addressing service To subscribe to this service follow these steps Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the Ethernet communication module that is connected to the remote device that you want to add to the DHCP service In the following example the communication module with the alias name of NOC01
341. to or disconnect a DTM from a device or module using the contextual pop up menu in the DTM Browser The DTM Browser indicates the relationship between the DTM and the remote module or device a connected DTM is displayed in bold text a disconnected DTM is displayed in normal text 46 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring To connect a DTM to or disconnect a DTM from its respective module or device follow these steps Step Action 1 In the DTM Browser select the DTM that you want to connect to or disconnect from the physical communication module or remote device NOTE If the module or device name appears in bold text it is connected and only the Disconnect command is enabled normal text it is disconnected and only the Connect command is enabled Click the right mouse button Result A pop up menu opens Select one of the following commands Connect e Disconnect NOTE The Connect and Disconnect commands are also available in the Unity Pro Edit menu Enabling Advanced Mode Use the contextual menu in the DTM Browser to toggle Unity Pro in or out of Advanced Mode thereby displaying or hiding expert level properties that help define Ethernet connections These properties are identified by the icon NOTE To maintain system performance confirm that Advanced Mode properties are configured only by persons with a solid understanding of communication protocols To toggle Advanc
342. troller B NOTE A single port can be a member of multiple VLANs 1A34009 10 2014 205 Optimizing Performance Port Mirroring Introduction Port mirroring lets you troubleshoot switch port transmissions by copying the traffic that passes through one port the source or mirrored port and sending the copied transmission to a second port the destination or mirror port where the packets can be examined In the following example the data packets transmitted over port 1 are copied and sent to port 6 To troubleshoot port 1 a PC with packet sniffing software is used to analyze the traffic on port 6 and thereby troubleshoot port 1 B A A target device of port 1 transmissions B PC with packet sniffing software connected to port 6 which mirrors port 1 transmissions Port mirroring does not affect the normal forwarding behavior of the mirrored port In many switches you can configure port mirroring so that you can forward and examine e only the incoming packets of a single mirrored port e only the outgoing packets of a single mirrored port e both the incoming and outgoing packets of a single mirrored port e the packets of several mirrored ports or the whole switch A packet sniffer s troubleshooting features should include e analyzing network performance e monitoring network activity Recommendation Schneider Electric recommends implementing port mirr
343. tus codes that may be present in the general status code field of a detected error response message Note that the extended code field is available for use in further describing any general status code Extended status codes are unique to each general status code within each object Each object manages the extended status values and value ranges including vendor specific All extended status values are reserved unless otherwise indicated within the object definition General Status Name Description of Status Status Code in hex 00 Success Service was successfully performed by the object specified 01 Connection unsuccessful A connection related service was unsuccessful along the connection path 02 Resource unavailable Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable 03 Invalid parameter value See status code 0x20 which is the preferred value to use for this condition 04 Path segment error The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the processing node Path processing stops when a path segment error is detected 05 Path destination unknown The path is referencing an object class instance or structure element that is not known or is not contained in the processing node Path processing stops when a path destination unknown error is detected 06 Partial transfer Only part of the expected data was transferred 07 Connection lo
344. type NIC22212_01_LO_ st Starting at the first available whole input word select the single row at byte 8 input Input bit Output Output bit _Default Item Name Root 4 ECEN S Offset Device Offset Connection Item Name Define Item s Delete Item s Show Properties NOOR WN A0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 if aaa eee 9 10 Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array 1A34009 10 2014 149 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action 4 Click the Define Item s button The Item Name Definition dialog opens xi New Item s Data Type z Define Selected Area As One or Several Single Item s V Item Name 32 char max l NIC2212_01_LO_st_IB8 omj e 5 Select Byte as the New Item s Data Type then click OK A new byte item is created Input Input bit Output Output bit JA Ofiset Device Offset Connection Item Name Default Item Name Root A 4 NIC2212_01_LO_st 2 z Define Item s 5 6 Delete Item s 7 8 NIC2212_01_LO st_IB8 Show Properties _ 9 0 i Select a zone and click on the Define Item s button to create one or several items an array OK Cancel Apply 6 Click Apply to save the new items and leave the page open 150 S1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action Repeat steps 2 6 for e
345. u how to use the DATA EXCH function block to retrieve diagnostic data from a remote device in this case an STB NIC 2212 network interface module at IP address 192 168 1 6 using the Get_Attribute_Single service You can perform the same explicit messaging service using the EtherNet IP Explicit Message window of the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool see page 300 Implementing the DATA_EXCH Function Block To implement the DATA EXCH function block you need to create and assign variables for the following blocks ManagParam 0 0 ReqSize ManagParam 3 DATA_EXCH 2 ManagParam 0 0 0 and ManagParam 3 ReqSize EN ENO ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP ADR RECP ReceivedData ActionType TYP DataToSend EMIS ManagParam GEST GEST ManagParam 1A34009 10 2014 279 Explicit Messaging Declaring Variables In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging configurations In this example the following variables were defined You can of course use different variable names in your explicit messaging configurations o Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types PM Sm Name FT i e ro ODOT Name Value Comment X Type X ActionType 16 01 Transmission followed by await reception DataToSend ARRAY 0 3 OFINT Cee B oo 12 Data
346. u selected for your project BMX NOC 0401 or BMX NOC 0401 2 NOTE The DSCP Value settings input in the QoS page are synchronized with the same settings in the QoS Queue tab of the Channel Properties Switch page Edits to a common property in either page will change that value in the other page The QoS page displays five EtherNet IP traffic types when you are operating in Advanced Mode see page 47 or two EtherNet IP traffic types when Advanced Mode is de selected To display the QoS page Step Description 1 Select the Services node in the navigation tree located on the left side of the Device Editor The Services page opens 2 In the Services page set the QoS Tagging field to Enabled then click OK or Apply The QoS node appears in the navigation tree 3 Select the QoS node in the navigation tree NOTE Refer to the topic Configuring Properties in the Device Editor see page 54 for instructions on how to edit properties 86 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring The QoS Page for the BMX NOC 0401 2 Ethernet Communication Module The following QoS page displays the default values for the BMX NOC 0401 2 module displays when operating in Advanced Mode Use Value from Configuration x r EtherNet IP Traffic DSCP Value for I O Data Scheduled Priority Messages DSCP Value for Explicit Messages DSCP Value for I O Data Urgent Priority Messages DSCP Value for I O Data Low Priority Messages
347. uirements the relevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2014 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 1A34009 10 2014 Table of Contents Safety Information 00 ccecwaceacenRewne sees e wn About the Book 0 0c cece e ee eee eee Chapter 1 Installation 2 2020202005 Physical Description of the BMX NOC 0401 Module Module Specifications 0 0 0 2 eee Communication Specifications 0 c eee eee Mounting the BMX NOC 0401 Module 00 Installing Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Software Uninstalling the Ethernet Configuration Tool Chapter 2 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Module 2 1 Ethernet Network Configuration Example 04 The Ethernet Network Example 2000020 cess 2 2 Creating a Project in Unity Pro 0 2 eee ee eee Creating a Project in Unity Pro 0 2 ee eee ee Configuring the Size and Location of Inputs and Outputs 2 3 The Unity Pro FDT DTM Interface 0 e ee eee DIM BroWSCl en tegiv eden hs eh ei lei Ooa heed DTM Browser Menu Commands 00 0 eee e eee eens Field Bus Discovery Service
348. upon the listed object types Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_All X X Returns the value of all attributes 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single x X Returns the value of the specified attribute X supported not supported 250 S1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects IO Connection Diagnostics Object Overview The IO Connection Diagnostics object presents the instances attributes and services described below Class ID 352 hex 850 decimal Instance IDs The IO Connection Diagnostics object presents two instance values e 0 class e 1 256 instance The instance number is the connection number in the configuration Attributes IO Connection Diagnostics object attributes are associated with each instance as follows Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision x 02 Max Instance x X supported not supported 1A34009 10 2014 251 CIP objects Instance ID 1 to 256 instance attributes Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value 01 IO Communication STRUCT x x Diagnostics IO Production Counter UDINT Increments at each production IO Consumption Counter UDINT Increments at each consumption IO Production Send Errors UINT Increments each time a Counter production is not sent IO Consumption Receive UINT Increments each
349. upported not supported S1A34009 10 2014 243 CIP objects 244 Attribute ID Description Type GET SET Value hex dec 05 05 Media Counters STRUCT Alignment Errors UDINT Frames that are not an integral number of octets in length FCS Errors UDINT CRC error detected Frames received with a dtected FCS checksum error Single Collisions UDINT Successfully transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision Multiple Collisions UDINT Successfully transmitted frames that experienced more than one collision SQE Test Errors UDINT Number of times the SQE test error is detected Deferred Transmissions UDINT Frames for which first transmission attempt is delayed because the medium is busy Late Collisions UDINT Number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bittimes into the transmission of a packet Excessive Collisions UDINT Frames for which transmission is not successful due to excessive collisions MAC Transmit Errors UDINT Frames for which transmission is not successful due to internal MAC sublayer transmit detected error Carrier Sense Errors UDINT Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or not asserted when attempting to transmit a frame Frame Too Long UDINT Frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size MAC Receive Errors
350. uration page see page 104 and look for the Connection Bit number Monitoring Connection Health Bits in an Animation Table Use an animation table to monitor the status of connection health bits and other variables To add health bits to an animation table follow these steps Step Action 1 In the Project Browser select the Animation Tables node and click the right mouse button A pop up menu opens 2 Select New Animation Table 188 1A34009 10 2014 Working With Derived Data Types Step Action In the New Animation Table dialog type in values for the following fields Name Type in a name for the new animation table In this example type in Connection_Health_Bits Number of Accept the default value of 100 animated characters The completed dialog looks like this New Animation Table a xi Name Functional Mode Connection_Health_Bits lt None gt v Comment r Extended String Animation Number of animated characters 100 range 20 300 L I Temporary Table om Click OK The dialog closes and the new Connection_Health_Bits animation table opens Double click on the first empty row in the Name column then click the ellipsis button The Instance Selection dialog opens 1A34009 10 2014 189 Working With Derived Data Types Step Action 6 In the
351. ut which may lead to a subsequent detected error Error An operation that Unity Pro was unable to complete Message A brief description of the core meaning of the event Detail Message A more detailed description of the event which may include parameter names location paths etc S1A34009 10 2014 331 Diagnostics Section 9 3 CPU I O Block Diagnostics Overview The CPU s I O Block contains diagnostic information relating to the operation of the BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet communication module This information can be accessed in Unity Pro at runtime This section describes the available I O Block data and how to access it What Is in This Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Accessing the Unity Pro Diagnostic Tools 333 Communication Channel Diagnostics in Unity Pro 335 Communication Module Diagnostics in Unity Pro 337 332 1A34009 10 2014 Diagnostics Accessing the Unity Pro Diagnostic Tools Overview The Unity Pro software provides diagnostic tools that let you view the e communication module status e communication module s e detected faults e O objects e communication channel s e MAC Address e P Address settings e detected faults These Unity Pro diagnostic tools are available in the BMX NOC 0401 Module Properties window only when Unity Pro is operating online NOTE If the module and software are disconnected use the Master DTM dia
352. value in the DSCP or TOS field in its IP header indicating the QoS priority The switch forwards packets based on this priority VLAN tag in Ethernet Each Ethernet packet contains a value in the header priority field in the VLAN tag in its Ethernet header indicating the QoS priority The switch forwards packets based on this priority Implicit Port based Switch ports are mapped to different QoS priorities For example switch port 1 is mapped to QoS priority 1 switch port 2 is mapped to QoS priority 2 etc Recommendation Schneider Electric recommends the use of devices including switches that support explicit Q0S tagging NOTE Some switches that support QoS tagging have this feature disabled by default Confirm that QoS is enabled when deploying each switch 1A34009 10 2014 201 Optimizing Performance IGMP Snooping Multicast Messaging Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is an essential feature of multicast messaging IGMP instructs routers and switches to forward Ethernet multicast packets to only those device ports that have requested these packets In the absence of IGMP snooping a switch forwards multicast packets out of all its ports resulting in greater network traffic wasted network bandwidth and degraded network performance Configure one Ethernet network switch as the IGMP querier This switch periodically polls the field devices connected to the network which causes all c
353. value of 0 WR The number of words in the remote device from 0 to 120 to which the communication module will Length write Because the Modbus device will be configured for 5 words of output items type in a value of 5 2 Click OK to save your edits and close the window The next step is to connect the Unity Pro project to the Advantys Island 166 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Connecting to the Advantys STB Island Overview In this example you will use the Advantys configuration software running on your PC to e connect the Advantys configuration software to the STB NIP 2212 and the 8 I O modules that comprise the Advantys STB island e upload Advantys STB island configuration to the Advantys configuration software in your PC e display a fieldbus image for the Advantys STB island showing the relative location of e input data e output data Using the data presented in the fieldbus image you can use Unity Pro to create input and output items that map to specific input output and output echo data NOTE Before proceeding with the following instructions confirm that you have auto configured the Advantys STB island by pressing the RST button on the front of the STB NIP 2212 module Making the Connection To connect to the STB NIP 2212 and I O modules using the Advantys configuration software Step Action 1 Startup the Advantys configuration software on your PC A dialog opens displ
354. vantys configuration software select Island A O Image Overview The I O Image window opens to the Modbus Image page 2 Select the cell 0 of the first word 45392 in the Input Data table to display in the middle of the page a description of the cell data and its source module Make a note of the register number and item information for that word 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each word NOTE The Modbus Image presents input and output data in the form of 16 bit words starting with word 1 You need to maintain this data format as you create input and output items in Unity Pro NOTE When you create items align items of data type WORD and DWORD as follows e WORD items align these items on a 16 bit boundary e DWORD items align these items on a 32 bit boundary 1A34009 10 2014 171 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network This process yields the following tables of input and output data Input Data Read Advantys Modbus Image Unity Pro Items STB Module Description Register Bit s Bytes Bit s 45392 0 1 0 0 1 DDI 3230 input data 1 not used 45393 0 1 2 0 1 DDI 3230 input status 3 not used 45394 0 1 4 0 1 DDO 3200 output data echo 5 not used 45395 0 1 6 0 1 DDO 3200 output status 7 not used 45396 0 3 8 0 3 DDI 3420 input data 9 not used 45397 0 3 10 0 3 DDI 3420 input status 11 n
355. ver pages to e display real time diagnostic data for both the module and other networked devices e read the values of and write values to Unity Pro application variables e manage and control access to the embedded web pages by assigning separate passwords for e viewing the diagnostic web pages and e using the Data Editor to write values to Unity Pro application variables Requirements The embedded web server presents module data in the form or standard HTML web pages Access the embedded web pages using Internet Explorer version 4 0 or higher running the Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 6 or higher S1A34009 10 2014 347 Embedded Web Pages Accessing the Home Page On First Use Before you begin to use the BMX NOC 0401 communication module s embedded web pages you need to e navigate to the web server e access web page content by inputting the default username and password see page 349 combination e change passwords see page 350 that are required for e accessing web pages and e writing data values using the Data Editor Navigating to the Web Server To access the embedded web server open an Internet browser then enter the IP address see page 65 of the Ethernet communication module in the format http IP address then click Enter NOTE If a DNS name has been assigned to the module the DNS name can be used instead of the IP address The web server opens displaying the Home page
356. vices to an Ethernet Network Configuring I O Items Overview The next task in this example is to add I O items to the configuration of the STB NIP 2212 and its 8 I O modules To accomplish this e use the Modbus Image page of the Advantys configuration software to identify the relative position of each I O module s inputs and outputs e use the Unity Pro Device Editor to create input and output items defining each item s e name e data type NOTE You can manually configure I O items only when Input Mode is set to Manual I O Item Types and Sizes Because the Modbus TCP network interface module transmits data in the form of 16 bit words in this example you will create every input and output item using the WORD data type This remains true even if the item contains only a few bits of data Bit packing is not permitted when as in this example the remote device is a Modbus TCP network interface module NOTE When you add more devices to your network it may be necessary to increase the size and index location of both inputs and outputs for your Unity Pro project see page 36 In this example the following number and type of items need to be created e 18 input words e 5 output words Mapping Input and Output Items Use the Fieldbus Image page of the I O Image Overview window in the Advantys configuration software to identify the number and type of I O items you need to create as follows Step Action 1 In the Ad
357. xt S1A34009 10 2014 95 Configuring Input Output Parameters The following table describes the G EST management parameter which is the only input output parameter Parameters Data Type Description GEST ARRAY 0 3 OF INT The management parameter consisting of 4 words The GEST management parameter presents the following structure Description Word Order MSB LSB System managed 1 Exchange number Activity bit the first bit of the first data word It indicates the execution status of the communication e 1 Email is being sent 0 Email complete 2 Operation report Communication report see page 396 see page 395 User managed 3 Timeout data Length the size of the data buffer NOTE The length parameter is an output parameter This word is written by the system and equals the total length of the email header body The maximum size of header body is 1024 characters 96 1A34009 10 2014 Configuring Configuring the Network Time Service The Network Time Protocol Client The Ethernet communication module includes a network time protocol NTP client After you enable the network time service see page 73 you can configure it by e identifying two external NTP servers a primary server and a secondary server the Ethernet communication module uses to synchronize its internal time setting e specifyi
358. y address elements Network Station because we are not bridging through another PLC station Use the ADDM function to convert the following character string to an address ADDM 0 1 0 192 168 1 6 UNC CIP where rack 0 module slot number 1 channel 0 remote device IP address 192 168 1 6 message type unconnected protocol CIP Configuring the ActionType Variable The ActionType variable identifies the function type for the DATA EXCH function block Variable Description Value hex ActionType Transmission followed by wait for response 16 01 284 1A34009 10 2014 Explicit Messaging Configuring the DataToSend Variable The DataToSend variable identifies the type of explicit message and the CIP request Variable Description Value hex DataToSend 0 CIP request service information e High byte request size in words 16 02 2 decimal e Low byte service code 16 4E 78 decimal 16 024E DataToSend 1 CIP request class information e High byte class 16 44 68 decimal e Low byte class segment 16 20 32 decimal 16 4420 DataToSend 2 CIP request instance information e High byte instance 16 01 1 decimal e Low byte instance segment 16 24 36 decimal 16 0124 DataToSend 3 Location of first word to be read e High byte 16 00 0 decimal e Low byte 16 31 49 decimal 16 0031 DataToSend 4
359. y specifying both the network multiplier and the requested packet interval RPI in ms Timeout Network Multiplier x RPI NOTE You can locate and configure these values in the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool Open the DTM Editor for the Ethernet communication module then edit the following settings e the network multiple is the Time out Multiplier parameter found in the Device List lt device gt lt connection gt Connection Settings page and e the RPI is the EM Connection RPI parameter found in the Channel Properties EtherNet IP page A large timeout value may affect the ability of the network to optimize the availability of connection resources re establish connections and update I O data when the connection is lost A small timeout value may unnecessarily cause the frequent closing and re establishing of connections It is preferable to use a larger timeout value for explicit messaging connections and a smaller timeout value for implicit messaging connections The specific value you employ depends on your application requirements 1A34009 10 2014 211 Optimizing Performance Connection Types and Protocols The connection type and transport protocol employed depends upon the message type and message protocol as follows Message Type Message Protocol Connection Type Connection Protocol Explicit EtherNet IP CIP TCP TCP IP Modbus TCP TCP TCP IP FT
360. your actual application Step Action 1 Open the DTM for the communications module in this example NOC01 by selecting it in the Device Editor then do one of the following e inthe main menu select Edit Open or e click the right mouse button and select Open in the pop up menu The communication module DTM opens in the Device Editor 2 In the navigation pane on the left side of the Device Editor select the node representing the connection from the communication module to the remote device in this case Device List NIC2212_01 Read Input Write Output Data 134 1A34009 10 2014 Adding Devices to an Ethernet Network Step Action Click on the Connection Settings tab to open the following page Connection Settings Connection Information Parameter I Connection Bit 1 gt Request Packet Interval RPI 30 Time out Multiplier x4 Description OK Cancel Apply NOTE To view the Time out Multiplier parameter confirm that Unity Pro is operating in Advanced Mode In the Connection Settings page edit the following settings Connection Bit Read only The offset for both the health bit and the control bit for this connection Offset values are auto generated by the Unity Pro Ethernet Configuration Tool beginning at 0 and are prioritized according to the connection type as follows 1 Modbus TCP connections 2 local slave connections
361. ypes Service ID Description Class Instance Notes hex dec 01 01 Get_Attributes_Alll x x Returns e all class attributes instance 0 e instance attributes 1 to 7 instance 1 0E 14 Get_Attribute_Single X x Returns the value of the specified attribute X supported not supported 230 1A34009 10 2014 CIP objects Assembly Object Overview The Assembly object consists of the attributes and services described below NOTE You can send an explicit message to the Assembly object only when no other connections have been established that read from or write to this object For example you can send an explicit message to the Assembly object if a local slave instance is enabled but no other module is scanning that local slave Class ID 04 Instance IDs The Assembly object presents the following instance identifiers e 0 class e 101 102 111 112 121 122 instance Attributes The Assembly object consists of the following attributes Instance ID 0 class attributes Attribute ID Description GET SET 01 Revision X 02 Max Instance X 03 Number of Instances X X supported not supported Instance attributes Instance ID Attribute ID Description Type GET SET 101 03 Local slave 1 T gt O input data Array of BYTE X 102 Local slave 1 O gt

Modicon M340 - BMX NOC 0401 Ethernet - Schneider

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents